TMS320VC5509A Fixed-Point
Digital Signal Processor
Data M anual
Literature Number: SPRS205A
November 2002 − Revised August 2003
!
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications,
enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue
any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing
orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’ s terms
and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in
accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI
deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all
parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for
their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products
and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right,
copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process
in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services
does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof.
Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property
of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without
alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction
of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for
such altered documentation.
Resale of T I products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that
product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and
is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application
solutions:
Products Applications
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Audio www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Automotive www.ti.com/automotive
DSP dsp.ti.com Broadband www.ti.com/broadband
Interface interface.ti.com Digital Control www.ti.com/digitalcontrol
Logic logic.ti.com Military www.ti.com/military
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Optical Networking www.ti.com/opticalnetwork
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Telephony www.ti.com/telephony
Video & Imaging www.ti.com/video
Wireless www.ti.com/wireless
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments
Post Office Box 655303 Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright 2003, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Revision History
iii
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
REVISION HISTORY
This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS205 device-specific data sheet
to make it an SPRS205A revision.
Scope: Updated all Timing Requirements tables, Switching Characteristics tables, and Timing Diagrams; added
new sections, etc.
PAGE(S)
NO. ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
Global changes:
− Replaced bit name “MP/MC” with “MPNMC”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.4” with “GPIO4”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.5” with “GPIO5”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.IO8” with “GPIO8”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.IO9” with “GPIO9”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.IO10” with “GPIO10”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.IO11” with “GPIO11”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.IO12” with “GPIO12”
− Replaced signal name “GPIO.IO13” with “GPIO13”
Removed table titled “USB Idle Control and Status Registers” (this was Table 3−27 in SPRS205)
Removed section titled “I2C Module Input and Output Voltage Levels” (this was Section 5.4 in SPRS205)
2Updated Section 2.1, Description
3Updated Section 2.2, Pin Assignments
4Table 2−1, Pin Assignments for the GHH Package:
− changed RVDD to CVDD (J10, L1, N7)
− changed CVDD to USBPLLVDD (G11)
− changed VSS to USBPLLVSS (G12)
5Updated Section 2.2.2, Pin Assignments for the PGE Package
6Table 2−2, Pin Assignments for the PGE Package:
− changed RVDD to CVDD (30, 53, 87)
− changed CVDD to USBPLLVDD (95)
− changed VSS to USBPLLVSS (92)
7Table 2−3, Signal Descriptions:
− added “FS = fail-safe buffer” to second footnote
− revised “BK‡” column for the following signals: C3, INT[4:0], RESET, GPIO[7:6,4:0] (LQFP) GPIO[7:0] (BGA), TCK, TDI,
TMS
− removed RVDD
− added USBPLLVDD and USBPLLVSS
− moved SUPPLY PINS section after TEST/EMULATION PINS section
19 Updated Figure 3−1, Block Diagram of the TMS320VC5509A
25 Section 3.1.6, Boot Configuration:
− revised bulleted list
− changed “GPIO.IO[0:3]” to “GPIO[3:0]”
− added reference to the Using the TMS320C5509/C5509A Bootloader application report (literature number SPRA375)
25 Updated Table 3−3, Boot Configuration Summary
27 Updated Table 3−4, Synchronization Control Function
Revision History
iv November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
PAGE(S)
NO. ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
28 Updated Section 3.4, I2C Interface
28 Restructured Section 3.5, Configurable External Buses
29 Section 3.5.1:
− renamed section from “External Bus Selection Register” to “External Bus Selection Register (EBSR)”
29 Revised Figure 3−6, External Bus Selection Register
29 Updated Table 3−5, External Bus Selection Register Bit Field Description
31 Table 3−6:
− renamed table from “TMS320VC5509A Routing of Parallel Port Signals” to “TMS320VC5509A Parallel Port Signal
Routing”
− C7: changed “Non-Multiplex HPI (10)” value from “HPI.HCNTL1” to “GPIO11”
− added footnote about Parallel Port Mode bits
31 Section 3.5.2, Parallel Port:
− updated description of “Data EMIF mode”
32 Section 3.5.3, Parallel Port Signal Routing:
− revised first paragraph
33 Figure 3−8:
− changed title from “Parallel Port Signal Summary” to “Parallel Port (EMIF) Signal Interface”
− revised drawing
34 Section 3.5.4:
− renamed section from “External Serial Ports” to “Serial Ports”
34 Table 3−7, TMS320VC5509A Serial Port1 Signal Routing:
− updated table
− added footnote about Serial Port1 Mode bits
34 Table 3−8, TMS320VC5509A Serial Port2 Signal Routing:
− updated table
− added footnote about Serial Port2 Mode bits
35 Added Section 3.6, General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Ports
41 Table 3−18, CPU Memory-Mapped Registers:
− switched order of C54x REGISTER column and C55x REGISTER column
43 Section 3.9, Peripheral Register Description:
− added note about CPU access latency
44 Updated Table 3−21, DMA Configuration Registers
50 Table 3−22, Real-Time Clock Registers:
− added Reset Value for the Interrupt Flag Register (RTCINTFL, 0x180C)
Revision History
v
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
PAGE(S)
NO. ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
43
43
44
50
50
50
51
52
53
54
54
54
55
55
56
57
59
59
59
Added or updated footnote about Reset Value “x” in the following tables:
Table 3−19, Idle Control, Status, and System Registers
Table 3−20, External Memory Interface Registers
Table 3−21, DMA Configuration Registers
Table 3−22, Real-Time Clock Registers
Table 3−23, Clock Generator
Table 3−24, Timers
Table 3−25, Multichannel Serial Port #0
Table 3−26, Multichannel Serial Port #1
Table 3−27, Multichannel Serial Port #2
Table 3−28, GPIO
Table 3−29, Device Revision ID
Table 3−30, I2C Module Registers
Table 3−31, Watchdog Timer Registers
Table 3−32, MMC/SD1 Module Registers
Table 3−33, MMC/SD2 Module Registers
Table 3−34, USB Module Registers
Table 3−35, Analog-to-Digital Controller (ADC) Registers
Table 3−36, External Bus Selection Register
Table 3−37, Secure ROM Register
51 Table 3−25, Multichannel Serial Port #0:
− changed description of MCR2_0[15:0] from “Multichannel Register 2, McBSP #0” to “Multichannel Control Register 2,
McBSP #0”
− changed description of MCR1_0[15:0] from “Multichannel Register 1, McBSP #0” to “Multichannel Control Register 1,
McBSP #0”
52 Table 3−26, Multichannel Serial Port #1:
− changed description of MCR2_1[15:0] from “Multichannel Register 2, McBSP #1” to “Multichannel Control Register 2,
McBSP #1“
− changed description of MCR1_1[15:0] from “Multichannel Register 1, McBSP #1” to “Multichannel Control Register 1,
McBSP #1”
53 Table 3−27, Multichannel Serial Port #2:
− changed description of MCR2_2[15:0] from “Multichannel Register 2, McBSP #2” to “Multichannel Control Register 2,
McBSP #2“
− changed description of MCR1_2[15:0] from “Multichannel Register 1, McBSP #2” to “Multichannel Control Register 1,
McBSP #2”
54 Updated Table 3−28, GPIO
54 Revised Table 3−29, Device Revision ID
54 Table 3−30, I2C Module Registers:
− revised footnote about unique 5509A I2C address
Revision History
vi November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
PAGE(S)
NO. ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
55 Table 3−32, MMC/SD1 Module Registers:
− 0x4800: replaced “MMCFCKCTL[8:0]” with “MMCFCLK[8:0]”
− 0x4805: replaced “MMCIM[12:0]” with “MMCIE[12:0]” and replaced “MMC Interrupt Mask Register” with “MMC Interrupt
Enable Register”
− 0x4808: replaced “MMC Block Length Enable” with “MMC Block Length Register”
− 0x480A: replaced “MMC Number of Blocks Counter” with “MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register”
− 0x480E: replaced “MMC Argument Register L” with “MMC Argument Register − Low”
− 0x480F: replaced “MMC Argument Register H” with “MMC Argument Register − High”
− 0x4810: replaced “MMC Argument Register 0” with “MMC Response Register 0”
− 0x4811: replaced “MMC Argument Register 1” with “MMC Response Register 1”
− 0x4812: replaced “MMC Argument Register 2” with “MMC Response Register 2”
− 0x4813: replaced “MMC Argument Register 3” with “MMC Response Register 3”
− 0x4814: replaced “MMC Argument Register 4” with “MMC Response Register 4”
− 0x4815: replaced “MMC Argument Register 5” with “MMC Response Register 5”
− 0x4816: replaced “MMC Argument Register 6” with “MMC Response Register 6”
− 0x4817: replaced “MMC Argument Register 7” with “MMC Response Register 7”
− 0x4818: replaced “MMC SPI Data Response Register” with “MMC Data Response Register”
− 0x4819: replaced “MMCETOK[7:0], MMC SPI Error Token Register” with “Reserved”
56 Table 3−33, MMC/SD2 Module Registers:
− 0x4C00: replaced “MMCFCKCTL[8:0]” with “MMCFCLK[8:0]”
− 0x4C05: replaced “MMCIM[12:0]” with “MMCIE[12:0]” and replaced “MMC Interrupt Mask Register” with “MMC Interrupt
Enable Register”
− 0x4C08: replaced “MMC Block Length Enable” with “MMC Block Length Register”
− 0x4C0A: replaced “MMC Number of Blocks Counter” with “MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register”
− 0x4C0E: replaced “MMC Argument Register L” with “MMC Argument Register − Low”
− 0x4C0F: replaced “MMC Argument Register H” with “MMC Argument Register − High”
− 0x4C10: replaced “MMC Argument Register 0” with “MMC Response Register 0”
− 0x4C11: replaced “MMC Argument Register 1” with “MMC Response Register 1”
− 0x4C12: replaced “MMC Argument Register 2” with “MMC Response Register 2”
− 0x4C13: replaced “MMC Argument Register 3” with “MMC Response Register 3”
− 0x4C14: replaced “MMC Argument Register 4” with “MMC Response Register 4”
− 0x4C15: replaced “MMC Argument Register 5” with “MMC Response Register 5”
− 0x4C16: replaced “MMC Argument Register 6” with “MMC Response Register 6”
− 0x4C17: replaced “MMC Argument Register 7” with “MMC Response Register 7”
− 0x4C18: replaced “MMC SPI Data Response Register” with “MMC Data Response Register”
− 0x4C19: replaced “MMCETOK[7:0], MMC SPI Error Token Register” with “Reserved”
57 Updated Table 3−34, USB Module Registers
59 Updated Table 3−35, Analog-to-Digital Controller (ADC) Registers
59 Table 3−36, External Bus Selection Register:
− added footnote about reset value as determined by GPIO0
60 Table 3−38, Interrupt Table:
− added footnote about INT4 and RTC interrupts
63 Section 3.10.2, Interrupt Timing:
− changed “1−0−0−0” to “1−1−0−0−0”
63 Updated Section 3.10.3, Waking Up From IDLE Condition
63 Updated Section 3.10.3.1, Waking Up From IDLE With Oscillator Disabled
65 Updated Section 4.1, Device and Development Tool Support Nomenclature
66 Added Section 4.2, TMS320VC5509A Device Nomenclature
Revision History
vii
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
PAGE(S)
NO. ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
67 Section 5, Electrical Specifications:
−updated all Timing Requirements tables, Switching Characteristics tables, and Timing Diagrams
67 Section 5.2, Recommended Operating Conditions:
− changed MIN CVDD from 1.52 V to 1.55 V
− changed MAX CVDD from 1.68 V to 1.65 V
− deleted RVDD
− moved RCVDD and RDVDD to “Peripherals” section
− added USBPLLVDD and USBPLLVSS
− updated NOTE about USB PLL
69 Section 5.3, Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Case Temperature Range:
− updated table
− updated NOTE about USB PLL
72 Updated Table 5−2, Recommended Crystal Parameters
86 Figure 5−13, SDRAM MRS Command:
EMIF.A[13:0] waveform: replaced “MRS Value” with “MRS Value 0x30§” and added associated footnote
87 Added Figure 5−14, SDRAM Self-Refresh Command
88 Added Section 5.8, Reset Timings
90 Added Section 5.9, External Interrupt Timings
90 Added Section 5.10, Wake-Up From IDLE
94 Restructured Section 5.14, Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timings
94 Added Section 5.14.1, McBSP0 Timings
96 Added Section 5.14.2, McBSP1 and McBSP2 Timings
104 Section 5.15:
− changed title from “HPI Timing” to “Enhanced Host-Port Interface (EHPI) Timings”
105 Figure 5−31:
− renamed figure from “HPI Nonmultiplexed Read/Write Timings” to “EHPI Nonmultiplexed Read/Write Timings”
106 Figure 5−32:
− renamed figure from “HPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Access Read/Write Timings Without Autoincrement” to
“EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Read/Write Timings Without Autoincrement”
107 Figure 5−33:
− renamed figure from “HPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Access Read Timings With Autoincrement” to “EHPI Multiplexed
Memory (HPID) Read Timings With Autoincrement”
108 Figure 5−34:
− renamed figure from “HPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Access Write Timings With Autoincrement” to “EHPI Multiplexed
Memory (HPID) Write Timings With Autoincrement”
109 Figure 5−35:
− renamed figure from “HPI Multiplexed Register Access Read/Write Timings” to “EHPI Multiplexed Register Read/Write
Timings”
Revision History
viii November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
PAGE(S)
NO. ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
110 Added Table 5−39, I2C Signals (SDA and SCL) Timing Requirements
114 Table 5−45, Universal Serial Bus (USB) Characteristics:
− updated footnote about USB
Contents
ix
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Contents
Section Page
1 TMS320VC5509A Features 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Introduction 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Description 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Pin Assignments 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Terminal Assignments for the GHH Package 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Pin Assignments for the PGE Package 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Signal Descriptions 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Functional Overview 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Memory 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM) 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM) 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 On-Chip Read-Only Memory (ROM) 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Secure ROM 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Memory Map 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.6 Boot Configuration 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Peripherals 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 DMA Channel Control Register (DMA_CCR) 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 I2C Interface 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Configurable External Buses 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Parallel Port 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Parallel Port Signal Routing 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 Serial Ports 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Ports 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Dedicated General-Purpose I/O 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Address Bus General-Purpose I/O 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 EHPI General-Purpose I/O 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 System Register 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Memory-Mapped Registers 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Peripheral Register Description 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Interrupts 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 IFR and IER Registers 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.2 Interrupt Timing 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.3 Waking Up From IDLE Condition 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.4 Idling Clock Domain When External Parallel Bus Operating in EHPI Mode 63. . . . . .
4 Documentation Support 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Device and Development Tool Support Nomenclature 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 TMS320VC5509A Device Nomenclature 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
xNovember 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Section Page
5 Electrical Specifications 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Case Temperature Range
(Unless Otherwise Noted) 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Package Thermal Resistance Characteristics 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Timing Parameter Symbology 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Clock Options 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Internal System Oscillator With External Crystal 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Layout Considerations 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Clock Generation in Bypass Mode (DPLL Disabled) 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4 Clock Generation in Lock Mode (DPLL Synthesis Enabled) 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 Real-Time Clock Oscillator With External Crystal 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Memory Interface Timings 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 Asynchronous Memory Timings 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) Timings 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Reset Timings 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Active) 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.2 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.3 Warm Reset 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 External Interrupt Timings 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Wake-Up From IDLE 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 XF Timings 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIOx) Timings 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13 TIN/TOUT Timings (Timer0 Only) 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timings 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.1 McBSP0 Timings 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.2 McBSP1 and McBSP2 Timings 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.3 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timings 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.14.4 McBSP General-Purpose I/O Timings 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15 Enhanced Host-Port Interface (EHPI) Timings 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.16 I2C Timings 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.17 MultiMedia Card (MMC) Timings 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.18 Secure Digital (SD) Card Timings 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.19 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Timings 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.20 ADC Timings 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Mechanical Data 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Ball Grid Array Mechanical Data 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Low-Profile Quad Flatpack Mechanical Data 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figures
xi
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
List of Figures
Figure Page
2−1 179-Terminal GHH Ball Grid Array (Bottom View) 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2−2 144-Pin PGE Low-Profile Quad Flatpack (Top View) 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−1 Block Diagram of the TMS320VC5509A 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−2 Secure ROM 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−3 TMS320VC5509A Memory Map (PGE Package) 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−4 TMS320VC5509A Memory Map (GHH Package) 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−5 DMA_CCR Bit Locations 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−6 External Bus Selection Register 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−7 Parallel Port Signal Routing 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−8 Parallel Port (EMIF) Signal Interface 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−9 I/O Direction Register (IODIR) Bit Layout 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−10 I/O Data Register (IODATA) Bit Layout 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−11 Address/GPIO Enable Register (AGPIOEN) Bit Layout 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−12 Address/GPIO Direction Register (AGPIODIR) Bit Layout 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−13 Address/GPIO Data Register (AGPIODATA) Bit Layout 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−14 EHPI GPIO Enable Register (EHPIGPIOEN) Bit Layout 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−15 EHPI GPIO Direction Register (EHPIGPIODIR) Bit Layout 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−16 EHPI GPIO Data Register (EHPIGPIODATA) Bit Layout 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−17 System Register Bit Locations 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−18 IFR0 and IER0 Bit Locations 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−19 IFR1 and IER1 Bit Locations 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4−1 Device Nomenclature for the TMS320VC5509A 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−1 3.3-V Test Load Circuit 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−2 Internal System Oscillator With External Crystal 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−3 Bypass Mode Clock Timings 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−4 External Multiply-by-N Clock Timings 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−5 Real-Time Clock Oscillator With External Crystal 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−6 Asynchronous Memory Read Timings 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−7 Asynchronous Memory Write Timings 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−8 Three SDRAM Read Commands 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−9 Three SDRAM WRT Commands 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−10 SDRAM ACTV Command 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−11 SDRAM DCAB Command 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−12 SDRAM REFR Command 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−13 SDRAM MRS Command 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−14 SDRAM Self-Refresh Command 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figures
xii November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Figure Page
5−15 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Active) Timings 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−16 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) Timings 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−17 Reset Timings 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−18 External Interrupt Timings 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−19 Wake-Up From IDLE Timings 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−20 XF Timings 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−21 General-Purpose Input/Output (IOx) Signal Timings 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−22 TIN/TOUT Timings When Configured as Inputs 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−23 TIN/TOUT Timings When Configured as Outputs 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−24 McBSP Receive Timings 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−25 McBSP Transmit Timings 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−26 McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−27 McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−28 McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−29 McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−30 McBSP General-Purpose I/O Timings 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−31 EHPI Nonmultiplexed Read/Write Timings 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−32 EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Read/Write Timings Without Autoincrement 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−33 EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Read Timings With Autoincrement 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−34 EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Write Timings With Autoincrement 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−35 EHPI Multiplexed Register Read/Write Timings 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−36 I2C Receive Timings 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−37 I2C Transmit Timings 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−38 MultiMedia Card (MMC) Timings 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−39 Secure Digital (SD) Timings 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−40 USB Timings 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−41 Full-Speed Loads 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6−1 TMS320VC5509A 179-Ball MicroStar BGA Plastic Ball Grid Array Package 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6−2 TMS320VC5509A 144-Pin Low-Profile Quad Flatpack 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables
xiii
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
List of Tables
Table Page
2−1 Pin Assignments for the GHH Package 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2−2 Pin Assignments for the PGE Package 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2−3 Signal Descriptions 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−1 DARAM Blocks 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−2 SARAM Blocks 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−3 Boot Configuration Summary 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−4 Synchronization Control Function 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−5 External Bus Selection Register Bit Field Description 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−6 TMS320VC5509A Parallel Port Signal Routing 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−7 TMS320VC5509A Serial Port1 Signal Routing 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−8 TMS320VC5509A Serial Port2 Signal Routing 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−9 I/O Direction Register (IODIR) Bit Functions 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−10 I/O Data Register (IODATA) Bit Functions 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−11 Address/GPIO Enable Register (AGPIOEN) Bit Functions 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−12 Address/GPIO Direction Register (AGPIODIR) Bit Functions 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−13 Address/GPIO Data Register (AGPIODATA) Bit Functions 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−14 EHPI GPIO Enable Register (EHPIGPIOEN) Bit Functions 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−15 EHPI GPIO Direction Register (EHPIGPIODIR) Bit Functions 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−16 EHPI GPIO Data Register (EHPIGPIODATA) Bit Functions 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−17 System Register Bit Fields 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−18 CPU Memory-Mapped Registers 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−19 Idle Control, Status, and System Registers 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−20 External Memory Interface Registers 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−21 DMA Configuration Registers 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−22 Real-Time Clock Registers 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−23 Clock Generator 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−24 Timers 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−25 Multichannel Serial Port #0 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−26 Multichannel Serial Port #1 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−27 Multichannel Serial Port #2 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−28 GPIO 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−29 Device Revision ID 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−30 I2C Module Registers 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−31 Watchdog Timer Registers 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−32 MMC/SD1 Module Registers 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−33 MMC/SD2 Module Registers 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−34 USB Module Registers 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−35 Analog-to-Digital Controller (ADC) Registers 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−36 External Bus Selection Register 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−37 Secure ROM Register 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−38 Interrupt Table 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−39 IFR0 and IER0 Register Bit Fields 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3−40 IFR1 and IER1 Register Bit Fields 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables
xiv November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table Page
5−1 Thermal Resistance Characteristics 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−2 Recommended Crystal Parameters 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−3 CLKIN Timing Requirements 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−4 CLKOUT Switching Characteristics 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−5 Multiply-By-N Clock Option Timing Requirements 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−6 Multiply-By-N Clock Option Switching Characteristics 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−7 Asynchronous Memory Cycle Timing Requirements 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−8 Asynchronous Memory Cycle Switching Characteristics 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−9 Synchronous DRAM Cycle Timing Requirements 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−10 Synchronous DRAM Cycle Switching Characteristics [SDRAM Clock = (1/2)X of CPU Clock] 80. .
5−11 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Active) Timing Requirements 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−12 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) Timing Requirements 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−13 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) Switching Characteristics 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−14 Reset Timing Requirements 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−15 Reset Switching Characteristics 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−16 External Interrupt Timing Requirements 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−17 Wake-Up From IDLE Switching Characteristics 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−18 XF Switching Characteristics 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−19 GPIO Pins Configured as Inputs Timing Requirements 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−20 GPIO Pins Configured as Outputs Switching Characteristics 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−21 TIN/T OUT Pins Configured as Inputs Timing Requirements 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−22 TIN/T OUT Pins Configured as Outputs Switching Characteristics 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−23 McBSP0 Timing Requirements 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−24 McBSP0 Switching Characteristics 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−25 McBSP1 and McBSP2 Timing Requirements 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−26 McBSP1 and McBSP2 Switching Characteristics 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−27 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0) 99. . . . . . . . . .
5−28 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0) 99. . . . . .
5−29 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0) 100. . . . . . . . . .
5−30 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0) 100. . . . . . .
5−31 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1) 101. . . . . . . . . .
5−32 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1) 101. . . . . .
5−33 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1) 102. . . . . . . . . .
5−34 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1) 102. . . . . . .
5−35 McBSP General-Purpose I/O Timing Requirements 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−36 McBSP General-Purpose I/O Switching Characteristics 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−37 EHPI Timing Requirements 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−38 EHPI Switching Characteristics 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−39 I2C Signals (SDA and SCL) Timing Requirements 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−40 I2C Signals (SDA and SCL) Switching Characteristics 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−41 MultiMedia Card (MMC) Timing Requirements 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−42 MultiMedia Card (MMC) Switching Characteristics 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−43 Secure Digital (SD) Card Timing Requirements 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−44 Secure Digital (SD) Card Switching Characteristics 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−45 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Characteristics 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5−46 ADC Characteristics 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features
1
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
1 TMS320VC5509A Features
DHigh-Performance, Low-Power, Fixed-Point
TMS320C55x Digital Signal Processor
− 5-ns Instruction Cycle Time for 200-MHz
Clock Rate at 1.6 V
− One/Two Instruction(s) Executed per
Cycle
− Dual Multipliers [Up to 400 Million
Multiply-Accumulates per Second
(MMACS)]
− Two Arithmetic/Logic Units (ALUs)
− Three Internal Data/Operand Read Buses
and Two Internal Data/Operand Write
Buses
D128K x 16-Bit On-Chip RAM, Composed of:
− 64K Bytes of Dual-Access RAM (DARAM)
8 Blocks of 4K × 16-Bit
− 192K Bytes of Single-Access RAM
(SARAM) 24 Blocks of 4K × 16-Bit
D64K Bytes of One-Wait-State On-Chip ROM
(32K × 16-Bit)
D8M × 16-Bit Maximum Addressable External
Memory Space (Synchronous DRAM)
D16-Bit External Parallel Bus Memory
Supporting Either:
− External Memory Interface (EMIF) With
GPIO Capabilities and Glueless Interface
to:
− Asynchronous Static RAM (SRAM)
− Asynchronous EPROM
− Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM)
− 16-Bit Parallel Enhanced Host-Port
Interface (EHPI) With GPIO Capabilities
DProgrammable Low-Power Control of Six
Device Functional Domains
DOn-Chip Scan-Based Emulation Logic
DOn-Chip Peripherals
− Two 20-Bit Timers
− Watchdog Timer
− 64-Bit Unique Device ID
− Six-Channel Direct Memory Access
(DMA) Controller
− Three Serial Ports Supporting a
Combination of:
− Up to 3 Multichannel Buffered Serial
Ports (McBSPs)
− Up to 2 MultiMedia/Secure Digital Card
Interfaces
− Programmable Digital Phase-Locked
Loop (DPLL) Clock Generator
− Seven (LQFP) or Eight (BGA) General-
Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins and a General-
Purpose Output Pin (XF)
− USB Full-Speed (12 Mbps) Slave Port
Supporting Bulk, Interrupt and
Isochronous Transfers
− Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Multi-Master
and Slave Interface
− Real-Time Clock (RTC) With Crystal
Input, Separate Clock Domain, Separate
Power Supply
− 4-Channel (BGA) or 2-Channel (LQFP)
10-Bit Successive Approximation A/D
DIEEE Std 1149.1† (JTAG) Boundary Scan
Logic
DPackages:
− 144-Terminal Low-Profile Quad Flatpack
(LQFP) (PGE Suffix)
− 179-Terminal MicroStar BGA (Ball Grid
Array) (GHH Suffix)
D2.7-V – 3.6-V I/O Supply Voltage
D1.6-V Core Supply Voltage
PRODUCT PREVIEW
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
TMS320C55x and MicroStar BGA are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
†IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
Introduction
2November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
2 Introduction
This section describes the main features of the TMS320VC5509A, lists the pin assignments, and describes
the function of each pin. This data manual also provides a detailed description section, electrical
specifications, parameter measurement information, and mechanical data about the available packaging.
NOTE: This data manual is designed to be used in conjunction with theTMS320C55x DSP Functional
Overview (literature number SPRU312), the TMS320C55x DSP CPU Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU371), and the TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU317).
2.1 Description
The TMS320VC5509A fixed-point digital signal processor (DSP) is based on the TMS320C55x DSP
generation CPU processor core. The C55x DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power
through increased parallelism and total focus on reduction in power dissipation. The CPU supports an internal
bus structure that is composed of one program bus, three data read buses, two data write buses, and
additional buses dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These buses provide the ability to perform up to
three data reads and two data writes in a single cycle. In parallel, the DMA controller can perform up to two
data transfers per cycle independent of the CPU activity.
The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit multiplication
in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic/logic unit (ALU) is supported by an additional 16-bit ALU. Use of
the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize parallel activity and power
consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data Unit (DU) of the C55x CPU.
The C55x DSP generation supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The
Instruction Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory and queues instructions
for the Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit decodes the instructions, directs tasks to AU and DU resources,
and manages the fully protected pipeline. Predictive branching capability avoids pipeline flushes on execution
of conditional instructions.
The general-purpose input and output functions and the10-bit A/D provide sufficient pins for status, interrupts,
and bit I/O for LCDs, keyboards, and media interfaces. The parallel interface operates in two modes, either
as a slave to a microcontroller using the HPI port or as a parallel media interface using the asynchronous EMIF.
Serial media is supported through two MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) peripherals and three
McBSPs.
The 5509A peripheral set includes an external memory interface (EMIF) that provides glueless access to
asynchronous memories like EPROM and SRAM, as well as to high-speed, high-density memories such as
synchronous DRAM. Additional peripherals include Universal Serial Bus (USB), real-time clock, watchdog
timer, I2C multi-master and slave interface, and a unique device ID. Three full-duplex multichannel buffered
serial ports (McBSPs) provide glueless interface to a variety of industry-standard serial devices, and
multichannel communication with up to 128 separately enabled channels. The enhanced host-port interface
(HPI) is a 16-bit parallel interface used to provide host processor access to 32K bytes of internal memory on
the 5509A. The HPI can be configured in either multiplexed or non-multiplexed mode to provide glueless
interface to a wide variety of host processors. The DMA controller provides data movement for six independent
channel contexts without CPU intervention, providing DMA throughput of up to two 16-bit words per cycle. Two
general-purpose timers, up to eight dedicated general-purpose I/O (GPIO) pins, and digital phase-locked loop
(DPLL) clock generation are also included.
The 5509A is supported by the industry’s award-winning eXpressDSP, Code Composer Studio Integrated
Development Environment (IDE), DSP/BIOS, Texas Instruments’ algorithm standard, and the industry’s
largest third-party network. The Code Composer Studio IDE features code generation tools including a
C Compiler and Visual Linker, simulator, RTDX, XDS510 emulation device drivers, and evaluation
modules. The 5509A is also supported by the C55x DSP Library which features more than 50 foundational
software kernels (FIR filters, IIR filters, FFTs, and various math functions) as well as chip and board support
libraries.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
C55x, eXpressDSP, Code Composer Studio, DSP/BIOS, RTDX, and XDS510 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Introduction
3
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
The TMS320C55x DSP core was created with an open architecture that allows the addition of
application-specific hardware to boost performance on specific algorithms. The hardware extensions on the
5509A strike the perfect balance of fixed function performance with programmable flexibility, while achieving
low-power consumption, and cost that traditionally has been dif ficult to find in the video-processor market. T h e
extensions allow the 5509A to deliver exceptional video codec performance with more than half its bandwidth
available for performing additional functions such as color space conversion, user-interface operations,
security, TCP/IP, voice recognition, and text-to-speech conversion. As a result, a single 5509A DSP can power
most portable digital video applications with processing headroom to spare. For more information, see the
TMS320C55x Hardware Extensions for Image/Video Applications Programmer’s Reference (literature
number SPRU098). For more information on using the the DSP Image Processing Library, see the
TMS320C55x Image/Video Processing Library Programmer’s Reference (literature number SPRU037).
2.2 Pin Assignments
Figure 2−1 illustrates the ball locations for the 179-pin ball grid array (BGA) package and is used in conjunction
with Table 2−1 to locate signal names and ball grid numbers.
DVDD is the power supply for the I/O pins while CVDD is the power supply for the core. VSS is the ground for
both the I/O pins and the core. RCVDD and RDVDD are RTC module core and I/O supply, respectively. USBVDD
is the USB module I/O (DP, DN, and PU) supply. ADVDD is the power supply for the digital portion of the ADC.
AVDD is the power supply for the analog part of the ADC. ADVSS is the ground pin for the digital portion of the
ADC. AVSS is the ground pin for the analog part of the ADC. USBPLLVDD and USBPLLVSS are the dedicated
supply and ground pins for the USB PLL, respectively.
2.2.1 Terminal Assignments for the GHH Package
1412 1310 118 9
P
M
L
J
H
K
N
5634
G
E
F
D
C
12
A
B
7
Figure 2−1. 179-Terminal GHH Ball Grid Array (Bottom View)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
4November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−1. Pin Assignments for the GHH Package
BALL # SIGNAL NAME BALL # SIGNAL
NAME BALL # SIGNAL
NAME BALL # SIGNAL
NAME
A2 VSS D5 GPIO5 H2 DVDD L13 D15
A3 GPIO4 D6 DR0 H3 A19 L14 CVDD
A4 DVDD D7 S10 H4 C4 M1 C10
A5 FSR0 D8 S11 H5 C5 M2 C13
A6 CVDD D9 DVDD H10 DVDD M3 VSS
A7 S12 D10 S25 H11 A’[0] M4 CVDD
A8 DVDD D11 VSS H12 RESET M5 VSS
A9 S20 D12 AIN2 H13 SDA M6 A5
A10 S21 D13 AIN1 H14 SCL M7 A1
A11 S23 D14 AIN0 J1 C6 M8 A15
A12 RTCINX1 E1 GPIO1 J2 DVDD M9 D3
A13 RDVDD E2 GPIO2 J3 C7 M10 D6
A14 RDVDD E3 DVDD J4 C8 M11 CVDD
B1 VSS E4 VSS J5 CVDD M12 DVDD
B2 CVDD E5 VSS J10 CVDD M13 VSS
B3 GPIO3 E6 DVDD J11 CVDD M14 D12
B4 TIN/TOUT0 E7 DX0 J12 TRST N1 VSS
B5 CLKR0 E8 S15 J13 TCK N2 VSS
B6 FSX0 E9 S13 J14 TMS N3 A13
B7 CVDD E10 NC K1 A18 N4 A10
B8 CVDD E11 AIN3 K2 C9 N5 A7
B9 VSS E12 ADVSS K3 C11 N6 DVDD
B10 S24 E13 VSS K4 VSS N7 CVDD
B11 VSS E14 XF K5 VSS N8 CVDD
B12 RTCINX2 F1 X1 K6 A3 N9 VSS
B13 RDVDD F2 X2/CLKIN K7 A2 N10 VSS
B14 AVSS F3 GPIO0 K8 D1 N11 D8
C1 PU F4 VSS K9 A14 N12 D11
C2 VSS F5 CLKOUT K10 DVDD N13 DVDD
C3 NC F10 ADVDD K11 EMU0 N14 VSS
C4 GPIO6 F11 VSS K12 EMU1/OFF P1 VSS
C5 VSS F12 INT4 K13 TDO P2 VSS
C6 CLKX0 F13 DVDD K14 TDI P3 A12
C7 VSS F14 INT3 L1 CVDD P4 A9
C8 S14 G1 CVDD L2 C14 P5 A17
C9 S22 G2 C1 L3 C12 P6 A4
C10 CVDD G3 A20 L4 A11 P7 A16
C11 VSS G4 C2 L5 A8 P8 DVDD
C12 RCVDD G5 C0 L6 A6 P9 D2
C13 AVSS G10 INT2 L7 A0 P10 D5
C14 AVDD G11 USBPLLVDD L8 D0 P11 D7
D1 GPIO7 G12 USBPLLVSS L9 D4 P12 D10
D2 USBVDD G13 INT1 L10 D9 P13 DVDD
D3 DN G14 INT0 L11 D13 P14 DVDD
D4 DP H1 C3 L12 D14
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
5
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
2.2.2 Pin Assignments for the PGE Package
The TMS320VC5509APGE 144-pin low-profile quad flatpack (LQFP) pin assignments are shown in
Figure 2−2 and is used in conjunction with Table 2−2 to locate signal names and pin numbers.
DVDD is the power supply for the I/O pins while CVDD is the power supply for the core. VSS is the ground for
both the I/O pins and the core. RCVDD and RDVDD are RTC module core and I/O supply, respectively. USBVDD
is the USB module I/O (DP, DN, and PU) supply. ADVDD is the power supply for the digital portion of the ADC.
AVDD is the power supply for the analog part of the ADC. ADVSS is the ground pin for the digital portion of the
ADC. AVSS is the ground pin for the analog part of the ADC. USBPLLVDD and USBPLLVSS are the dedicated
supply and ground pins for the USB PLL, respectively.
72
37
73
36
108
109
144
1
Figure 2−2. 144-Pin PGE Low-Profile Quad Flatpack (Top View)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
6November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−2. Pin Assignments for the PGE Package
PIN NO. SIGNAL NAME PIN NO. SIGNAL NAME PIN NO. SIGNAL NAME PIN NO. SIGNAL NAME
1 VSS 37 VSS 73 VSS 109 RDVDD
2 PU 38 A13 74 D12 110 RCVDD
3 DP 39 A12 75 D13 111 RTCINX2
4 DN 40 A11 76 D14 112 RTCINX1
5 USBVDD 41 CVDD 77 D15 113 VSS
6 GPIO7 42 A10 78 CVDD 114 VSS
7 VSS 43 A9 79 EMU0 115 VSS
8 DVDD 44 A8 80 EMU1/OFF 116 S23
9 GPIO2 45 VSS 81 TDO 117 S25
10 GPIO1 46 A7 82 TDI 118 CVDD
11 VSS 47 A6 83 CVDD 119 S24
12 GPIO0 48 A5 84 TRST 120 S21
13 X2/CLKIN 49 DVDD 85 TCK 121 S22
14 X1 50 A4 86 TMS 122 VSS
15 CLKOUT 51 A3 87 CVDD 123 S20
16 C0 52 A2 88 DVDD 124 S13
17 C1 53 CVDD 89 SDA 125 S15
18 CVDD 54 A1 90 SCL 126 DVDD
19 C2 55 A0 91 RESET 127 S14
20 C3 56 DVDD 92 USBPLLVSS 128 S11
21 C4 57 D0 93 INT0 129 S12
22 C5 58 D1 94 INT1 130 S10
23 C6 59 D2 95 USBPLLVDD 131 DX0
24 DVDD 60 VSS 96 INT2 132 CVDD
25 C7 61 D3 97 INT3 133 FSX0
26 C8 62 D4 98 DVDD 134 CLKX0
27 C9 63 D5 99 INT4 135 DR0
28 C11 64 VSS 100 VSS 136 FSR0
29 CVDD 65 D6 101 XF 137 CLKR0
30 CVDD 66 D7 102 VSS 138 VSS
31 C14 67 D8 103 ADVSS 139 DVDD
32 C12 68 CVDD 104 ADVDD 140 TIN/TOUT0
33 VSS 69 D9 105 AIN0 141 GPIO6
34 C10 70 D10 106 AIN1 142 GPIO4
35 C13 71 D11 107 AVDD 143 GPIO3
36 VSS 72 DVDD 108 AVSS 144 VSS
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
7
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
2.3 Signal Descriptions
Table 2−3 lists each signal, function, and operating mode(s) grouped by function. See Section 2.2 for pin
locations based on package type.
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions
TERMINAL
NAME MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME I/O/Z†FUNCTION BK‡RESET
CONDITION
PARALLEL BUS
A[13:0] I/O/Z
A subset of the parallel address bus A13−A0 of the C55x DSP core
bonded to external pins. These pins serve in one of three functions: HPI
address bus (HPI.HA[13:0]), EMIF address bus (EMIF.A[13:0]), or
general-purpose I/O (GPIO.A[13:0]). The initial state of these pins
depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
The address bus has a bus holder feature that eliminates passive
component requirement and the power dissipation associated with them.
The bus holders keep the address bus at the previous logic level when the
bus goes into a high-impedance state.
GPIO0 = 1:
HPI.HA[13:0] I
HPI address bus. HPI.HA[13:0] is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit
field of the External Bus Selection Register is 10. This setting enables the
HPI in non-multiplexed mode.
HPI.HA[13:0] provides DSP internal memory access to host. In
non-multiplexed mode, these signals are driven by an external host as
address lines.
BK
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.A[13:0]
GPIO0 = 0:
EMIF.A[13:0] O/Z
EMIF address bus. EMIF.A[13:0] is selected when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is 01. This setting enables
the full EMIF mode and the EMIF drives the parallel port address bus. The
internal A[14] address is exclusive-ORed with internal A[0] address and
the result is routed to the A[0] pin.
Input,
HPI.HA[13:0]
GPIO.A[13:0] I/O/Z
General-purpose I/O address bus. GPIO.A[13:0] is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is 11.
This setting enables the HPI in multiplexed mode with the Parallel Port
GPIO register controlling the parallel port address bus. GPIO is also
selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field is 00, enabling the Data
EMIF mode.
A′[0]
(BGA only) EMIF.A′[0] O/Z EMIF address bus A′[0]. This pin is not multiplexed with EMIF.A[14] and is
used as the least significant external address pin on the BGA package. Output
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
8November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
PARALLEL BUS (CONTINUED)
A[15:14]
(BGA only) I/O/Z
A subset of the parallel address bus A15−A14 of the C55x DSP core
bonded to external pins. These pins serve in one of two functions: EMIF
address bus (EMIF.A[15:14]), or general-purpose I/O (GPIO.A[15:14]).
The initial state of these pins depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1
for more information.
The address bus has a bus holder feature that eliminates passive
component requirement and the power dissipation associated with them.
The bus holders keep the address bus at the previous logic level when the
bus goes into a high-impedance state.
BK
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.A[15:14]
EMIF.A[15:14] O/Z EMIF address bus. EMIF.A[15:14] is selected when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is 01. This setting enables
the full EMIF mode and the EMIF drives the parallel port address bus.
BK
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
GPIO.A[15:14]
GPIO.A[15:14] I/O/Z
General-purpose I/O address bus. GPIO.A[15:14] is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is 11.
This setting enables the HPI in multiplexed mode with the Parallel Port
GPIO register controlling the parallel port address bus. GPIO is also
selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field is 00, enabling the Data
EMIF mode.
GPIO.A[15:14]
A[20:16]
(BGA only) EMIF.A[20:16] O/Z
EMIF address bus. At reset, these address pins are set as output.
NOTE: These pins only function as EMIF address pins and they are not
multiplexed for any other function.
Output
D[15:0] I/O/Z
A subset of the parallel bidirectional data bus D31−D0 of the C55xDSP
core. These pins serve in one of two functions: EMIF data bus
(EMIF.D[15:0]) or HPI data bus (HPI.HD[15:0]). The initial state of these
pins depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
The data bus includes bus keepers to reduce the static power dissipation
caused by floating, unused pins. This eliminates the need for external bias
resistors on unused pins. When the data bus is not being driven by the
CPU, the bus keepers keep the pins at the logic level that was most
recently driven. (The data bus keepers are disabled at reset, and can be
enabled/disabled under software control.)
BK
GPIO0 = 1:
Input,
EMIF.D[15:0]
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HD[15:0]
EMIF.D[15:0] I/O/Z EMIF data bus. EMIF.D[15:0] is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit
field of the External Bus Selection Register is 00 or 01.
HPI.HD[15:0]
HPI.HD[15:0] I/O/Z HPI data bus. HPI.HD[15:0] is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit
field of the External Bus Selection Register is 10 or 11.
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
9
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
PARALLEL BUS (CONTINUED)
C0 I/O/Z
EMIF asynchronous memory read enable or general-purpose IO8. This
pin serves in one of two functions: EMIF asynchronous memory read
enable (EMIF.ARE) or general-purpose IO8 (GPIO8). The initial state of
this pin depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.ARE
EMIF.ARE O/Z Active-low EMIF asynchronous memory read enable. EMIF.ARE is
selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection
Register is 00 or 01.
BK
EMIF.ARE
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
GPIO8 I/O/Z General-purpose IO8. GPIO8 is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit
field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
GPIO8
C1 O/Z
EMIF asynchronous memory output enable or HPI interrupt output. This
pin serves in one of two functions: EMIF asynchronous memory output
enable (EMIF.AOE) or HPI interrupt output (HPI.HINT). The initial state of
this pin depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.AOE
EMIF.AOE O/Z Active-low asynchronous memory output enable. EMIF.AOE is selected
when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register
is 00 or 01.
EMIF.AOE
GPIO0 = 0:
Output,
HPI.HINT O/Z Active-low HPI interrupt output. HPI.HINT is selected when the Parallel
Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is 10 or 11.
Output,
HPI.HINT
C2 I/O/Z
EMIF asynchronous memory write enable or HPI read/write. This pin
serves in one of two functions: EMIF asynchronous memory write enable
(EMIF.AWE) or HPI read/write (HPI.HR/W). The initial state of this pin
depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.AWE
EMIF.AWE O/Z Active-low EMIF asynchronous memory write enable. EMIF.AWE is
selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection
Register is 00 or 01.
BK EMIF.AWE
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HR/W I HPI read/write. HPI.HR/W is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field
of the External Bus Selection Register is 10 or 11. HPI.HR/W controls the
direction of the HPI transfer.
Input,
HPI.HR/W
C3 I/O/Z
EMIF data ready input or HPI ready output. This pin serves in one of two
functions: EMIF data ready input (EMIF.ARDY) or HPI ready output
(HPI.HRDY). The initial state of this pin depends on the GPIO0 pin. See
Section 3.5.1 for more information. GPIO0 = 1:
Input,
EMIF.ARDY I
EMIF data ready input. Used to insert wait states for slow memories.
EMIF.ARDY is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the
External Bus Selection Register is 00 or 01.
NOTE: With the buskeeper being active after reset, a strong 2.2K pullup is
necessary on this signal.
Input,
EMIF.ARDY
GPIO0 = 0:
Output,
HPI.HRDY
HPI.HRDY O/Z HPI ready output. HPI.HRDY is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit
field of the External Bus Selection Register is 10 or 11.
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
10 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
PARALLEL BUS (CONTINUED)
C4 I/O/Z
EMIF chip select for memory space CE0 or general-purpose IO9. This pin
serves in one of two functions: EMIF chip select for memory space CE0
(EMIF.CE0) or general-purpose IO9 (GPIO9). The initial state of this pin
depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.CE0
EMIF.CE0 O/Z Active-low EMIF chip select for memory space CE0. EMIF.CE0 is selected
when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register
is set to 00 or 01.
BK
EMIF.CE0
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
GPIO9 I/O/Z General-purpose IO9. GPIO9 is selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit
field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
GPIO9
C5 I/O/Z
EMIF chip select for memory space CE1 or general-purpose IO10. This pin
serves in one of two functions: EMIF chip-select for memory space CE1
(EMIF.CE1) or general-purpose IO10 (GPIO10). The initial state of this pin
depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.CE1
EMIF.CE1 O/Z Active-low EMIF chip select for memory space CE1. EMIF.CE1 is selected
when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register
is set to 00 or 01.
BK
EMIF.CE1
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
GPIO10 I/O/Z General-purpose IO10. GPIO10 is selected when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
GPIO10
C6 I/O/Z
EMIF chip select for memory space CE2 or HPI control input 0. This pin
serves in one of two functions: EMIF chip-select for memory space CE2
(EMIF.CE2) or HPI control input 0 (HPI.HCNTL0). The initial state of this
pin depends on the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information. GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.CE2 O/Z Active-low EMIF chip select for memory space CE2. EMIF.CE2 is selected
when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register
is set to 00 or 01. BK
Output,
EMIF.CE2
GPIO0 = 0:
HPI.HCNTL0 I
HPI control input 0. This pin, in conjunction with HPI.HCNTL1, selects a
host access to one of the three HPI registers. HPI.HCNTL0 is selected
when the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register
is set to 10 or 11.
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HCNTL0
C7 I/O/Z
EMIF chip select for memory space CE3, general-purpose IO11, or HPI
control input 1. This pin serves in one of three functions: EMIF chip-select
for memory space CE3 (EMIF.CE3), general-purpose IO11 (GPIO11), or
HPI control input 1 (HPI.HCNTL1). The initial state of this pin depends on
the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information. GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.CE3 O/Z Active-low EMIF chip select for memory space CE3. EMIF.CE3 is selected
when the Parallel Port Mode bit field is of the External Bus Selection
Register set to 00 or 01. BK
Output,
EMIF.CE3
GPIO0 = 0:
GPIO11 I/O/Z General-purpose IO11. GPIO11 is selected when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field is set to 10.
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HCNTL1
HPI.HCNTL1 I HPI control input 1. This pin, in conjunction with HPI.HCNTL0, selects a
host access to one of the three HPI registers. The HPI.HCNTL1 mode is
selected when the Parallel Port Mode bit field is set to 11.
HPI.HCNTL1
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
11
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
PARALLEL BUS (CONTINUED)
C8 I/O/Z
EMIF byte enable 0 control or HPI byte identification. This pin serves in one
of two functions: EMIF byte enable 0 control (EMIF.BE0) or HPI byte
identification (HPI.HBE0). The initial state of this pin depends on the
GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.BE0
EMIF.BE0 O/Z Active-low EMIF byte enable 0 control. EMIF.BE0 is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to
00 or 01.
BK EMIF.BE0
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HBE0 I HPI byte identification. This pin, in conjunction with HPI.HBE1, identifies
the first or second byte of the transfer. HPI.HBE0 is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
HPI.HBE0
C9 I/O/Z
EMIF byte enable 1 control or HPI byte identification. This pin serves in one
of two functions: EMIF byte enable 1 control (EMIF.BE1) or HPI byte
identification (HPI.HBE1). The initial state of this pin depends on the
GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.BE1
EMIF.BE1 O/Z Active-low EMIF byte enable 1 control. EMIF.BE1 is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to
00 or 01.
BK EMIF.BE1
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HBE1 I HPI byte identification. This pin, in conjunction with HPI.HBE0, identifies
the first or second byte of the transfer. HPI.HBE1 is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
HPI.HBE1
C10 I/O/Z
EMIF SDRAM row strobe, HPI address strobe, or general-purpose IO12.
This pin serves in one of three functions: EMIF SDRAM row strobe
(EMIF.SDRAS), HPI address strobe (HPI.HAS), or general-purpose IO12
(GPIO12). The initial state of this pin depends on the GPIO0 pin. See
Section 3.5.1 for more information. GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.SDRAS O/Z Active-low EMIF SDRAM row strobe. EMIF.SDRAS is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to
00 or 01. BK
Output,
EMIF.SDRAS
GPIO0 = 0:
HPI.HAS I Active-low HPI address strobe. This signal latches the address in the HPIA
register in the HPI Multiplexed mode. HPI.HAS is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field is set to 11.
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HAS
GPIO12 I/O/Z General-purpose IO12. GPIO12 is selected when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field is set to 10.
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
12 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
PARALLEL BUS (CONTINUED)
C11 I/O/Z
EMIF SDRAM column strobe or HPI chip select input. This pin serves in
one of two functions: EMIF SDRAM column strobe (EMIF.SDCAS) or HPI
chip select input (HPI.HCS). The initial state of this pin depends on the
GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.SDCAS
EMIF.SDCAS O/Z Active-low EMIF SDRAM column strobe. EMIF.SDCAS is selected when
the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set
to 00 or 01.
BK EMIF.SDCAS
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HCS I HPI Chip Select Input. HPI.HCS is the select input for the HPI and must be
driven low during accesses. HPI.HCS is selected when the Parallel Port
Mode bit field is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
HPI.HCS
C12 I/O/Z
EMIF SDRAM write enable or HPI Data Strobe 1 input. This pin serves in
one of two functions: EMIF SDRAM write enable (EMIF.SDWE) or HPI
data strobe 1 (HPI.HDS1). The initial state of this pin depends on the
GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.SDWE
EMIF.SDWE O/Z EMIF SDRAM write enable. EMIF. SDWE is selected when the Parallel
Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to 00 or 01 . BK
EMIF.SDWE
GPIO0 = 0:
HPI.HDS1 I HPI Data Strobe 1 Input. HPI.HDS1 is driven by the host read or write
strobes to control the transfer. HPI.HDS1 is selected when the Parallel
Port Mode bit field is set to 10 or 11.
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HDS1
C13 I/O/Z
SDRAM A10 address line or general-purpose IO13. This pin serves in one
of two functions: SDRAM A10 address line (EMIF.SDA10) or
general-purpose IO13 (GPIO13). The initial state of this pin depends on
the GPIO0 pin. See Section 3.5.1 for more information. GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.SDA10 O/Z
SDRAM A10 address line. Address line/autoprecharge disable for
SDRAM memory. Serves as a row address bit (logically equivalent to A12)
during ACTV commands and also disables the autoprecharging function
of SDRAM during read or write operations. EMIF.SDA10 is selected when
the Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set
to 00 or 01.
BK
Output,
EMIF.SDA10
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
GPIO13
GPIO13 I/O/Z General-purpose IO13. GPIO13 is selected when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field is set to 10 or 11.
C14 I/O/Z
Memory interface clock for SDRAM, HPI Data Strobe 2 input, or
general-purpose IO14. This pin serves in one of two functions: memory
interface clock for SDRAM (EMIF.CLKMEM) or HPI data strobe 2
(HPI.HDS2). The initial state of this pin depends on the GPIO0 pin. See
Section 3.5.1 for more information.
GPIO0 = 1:
Output,
EMIF.CLKMEM
EMIF.CLKMEM O/Z Memory interface clock for SDRAM. EMIF.CLKMEM is selected when the
Parallel Port Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to
00 or 01.
BK
EMIF.CLKMEM
GPIO0 = 0:
Input,
HPI.HDS2 I HPI Data Strobe 2 Input. HPI.HDS2 is driven by the host read or write
strobes to control the transfer. HPI.HDS2 is selected when the Parallel
Port Mode bit field is set to 10 or 11.
Input,
HPI.HDS2
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
13
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
INITIALIZATION, INTERRUPT, AND RESET PINS
INT[4:0] I Active-low external user interrupt inputs. INT[4:0] are maskable and are
prioritized b y the interrupt enable register (IER) and the interrupt mode bit.
INT[4:0] can be polled and reset reading the interrupt flag register (IFR). H, FS Input
RESET I
Active-low reset. RESET causes the digital signal processor (DSP) to
terminate execution and forces the program counter to FF8000h. When
RESET is brought to a high level, execution begins at location FF8000h of
program memory. RESET affects various registers and status bits. Use an
exernal pullup resistor on this pin.
H, FS Input
BIT I/O SIGNALS
GPIO[7:6,4:0] (LQFP)
GPIO[7:0] (BGA) I/O/Z
7-bit (LQFP package) or 8-bit (BGA package) Input/Output lines that can
be individually configured as inputs or outputs, and also individually set or
reset when configured as outputs. At reset, these pins are configured as
inputs. After reset, the on-chip bootloader sample GPIO[3:0] to determine
the boot mode selected.
BK
(GPIO5
only)
H
Input
EMIF.CKE
(GPIO4) O/Z
SDRAM CKE signal. The GPIO4 pin can be configured to serve as
SDRAM CKE pin by setting the following bits in the External Bus Selection
Register: CKE SEL = 1 and CKE EN = 1. In default mode, this pin serves as
GPIO4.
H
(except
GPIO5) Input
(GPIO4)
XF O/Z
External flag. XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction, set low by BCLR
XF instruction or by loading ST1. XF is used for signaling other processors
in multiprocessor configurations or used as a general-purpose output pin.
XF goes into the high-impedance state when OFF is low, and is set high
following reset.
Output
EMIF.CKE O SDRAM CKE signal. The XF pin can be configured to serve as SDRAM
CKE pin by setting the following bits in the External Bus Selection Register:
CKE SEL = 0 and CKE EN = 1. In default mode, this pin serves as XF.
Output
(XF)
OSCILLATOR/CLOCK SIGNALS
CLKOUT O/Z DSP clock output signal. CLKOUT cycles at the machine-cycle rate of the
CPU. CLKOUT goes into high-impedance state when OFF is low. Output
X2/CLKIN I/O
System clock/oscillator input. If the internal oscillator is not being used,
X2/CLKIN functions as the clock input.
NOTE: The USB module requires a 48 MHz clock. Since this input clock
is used by both the CPU PLL and the USB module PLL, it must
be a factor of 48 MHz in order for the programmable PLL to
produce the required 48 MHz USB module clock.
In CLKGEN domain idle mode, this pin becomes output and is
driven low to stop external crystals (if used) from oscillating or an
external clock source from driving the DSP internal logics.
Oscillator
Input
X1 O Output pin from the internal system oscillator for the crystal. If the internal
oscillator is not used, X1 should be left unconnected. X1 does not go into
the high-impedance state when OFF is low.
Oscillator
Output
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
14 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
TIMER SIGNALS
TIN/TOUT0 I/O/Z
Timer0 Input/Output. When output, TIN/TOUT0 signals a pulse or a
change of state when the on-chip timer counts down past zero. When
input, TIN/TOUT0 provides the clock source for the internal timer module.
At reset, this pin is configured as an input.
NOTE: Only the Timer0 signal is brought out. The Timer1 signal is
terminated internally and is not available for external use.
Input
REAL-TIME CLOCK
RTCINX1 I Real-Time Clock Oscillator input Input
RTCINX2 O Real-Time Clock Oscillator output Output
I2C
SDA I/O/Z I2C (bidirectional) data. At reset, this pin is in high-impedance mode. Hi-Z
SCL I/O/Z I2C (bidirectional) clock. At reset, this pin is in high-impedance mode. Hi-Z
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORTS SIGNALS
CLKR0 I/O/Z McBSP0 receive clock. CLKR0 serves as the serial shift clock for the serial
port receiver. At reset, this pin is in high-impedance mode. H Hi-Z
DR0 I McBSP0 receive data Input
FSR0 I/O/Z McBSP0 receive frame synchronization. The FSR0 pulse initiates the data
receive process over DR0. At reset, this pin is in high-impedance mode. Hi-Z
CLKX0 I/O/Z McBSP0 transmit clock. CLKX0 serves as the serial shift clock for the
serial port transmitter. The CLKX0 pin is configured as input after reset. H Input
DX0 O/Z McBSP0 transmit data. DX0 is placed in the high-impedance state when
not transmitting, when RESET is asserted, or when OFF is low. Hi-Z
FSX0 I/O/Z McBSP0 transmit frame synchronization. The FSX0 pulse initiates the
data transmit process over DX0. Configured as an input following reset. Input
S10 I/O/Z McBSP1 receive clock or MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital1
command/response. At reset, this pin is configured as McBSP1.CLKR.
McBSP1.CLKR I/Z
McBSP1 receive clock. McBSP1.CLKR serves as the serial shift clock for
the serial port receiver. McBSP1.CLKR is selected when the External B u s
Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field or following
reset.
H Input
MMC1.CMD
SD1.CMD I/O/Z MMC1 or SD1 command/response is selected when the External Bus
Selection Register has 10 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field.
S11 I/O/Z McBSP1 data receive or Secure Digital1 data1. At reset, this pin is
configured as McBSP1.DR.
McBSP1.DR I/Z McBSP1 serial data receive. McBSP1.DR is selected when the External
Bus Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field or following
reset. Input
SD1.DAT1 I/O/Z SD1 data1 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register has 10 in
the Serial Port1 Mode bit field.
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
15
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORTS SIGNALS (CONTINUED)
S12 I/O/Z McBSP1 receive frame synchronization or Secure Digital1 data2. At reset,
this pin is configured as McBSP1.FSR.
McBSP1.FSR I/Z McBSP1 receive frame synchronization. The McBSP1.FSR pulse initiates
the data receive process over McBSP1.DR. Input
SD1.DAT2 I/O/Z SD1 data2 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register has 10 in
the Serial Port1 Mode bit field.
S13 O/Z McBSP1 serial data transmit or MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital1 serial
clock. At reset, this pin is configured as McBSP1.DX.
McBSP1.DX O/Z
McBSP1 serial data transmit. McBSP1.DX is placed in the
high-impedance state when not transmitting, when RESET is asserted, or
when OFF is low. McBSP1.DX is selected when the External Bus
Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field or following
reset.
BK Hi-Z
MMC1.CLK
SD1.CLK OMMC1 or SD1 serial clock is selected when the External Bus Selection
Register has 10 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field.
S14 I/O/Z McBSP1 transmit clock or MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital1 data0. At
reset, this pin is configured as McBSP1.CLKX.
McBSP1.CLKX I/O/Z
McBSP1 transmit clock. McBSP1.CLKX serves as the serial shift clock f o r
the serial port transmitter. The McBSP1.CLKX pin is configured as input
after reset. McBSP1.CLKX is selected when the External Bus Selection
Register has 00 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field or following reset.
H Input
MMC1.DAT
SD1.DAT0 I/O/Z MMC1 or SD1 data0 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register
has 10 in the Serial Port1 Mode Bit field.
S15 I/O/Z McBSP1 transmit frame synchronization or Secure Digital1 data3. At
reset, this pin is configured as McBSP1.FSX.
McBSP1.FSX I/O/Z
McBSP1 transmit frame synchronization. The McBSP1.FSX pulse
initiates the data transmit process over McBSP1.DX. Configured as an
input following reset. McBSP1.FSX is selected when the External Bus
Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port1 Mode bit field or following
reset.
Input
SD1.DAT3 I/O/Z SD1 data3 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register has 10 in
the Serial Port1 Mode bit field.
S20 I/O/Z McBSP2 receive clock or MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital2
command/response. At reset, this pin is configured as McBSP2.CLKR.
McBSP2.CLKR I
McBSP2 receive clock. McBSP2.CLKR serves as the serial shift clock for
the serial port receiver. McBSP2.CLKR is selected when the External B u s
Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field or following
reset.
H Input
MMC2.CMD
SD2.CMD I/O/Z MMC2 or SD2 command/response is selected when the External Bus
Selection Register has 10 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field.
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
16 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORTS SIGNALS (CONTINUED)
S21 I/O/Z McBSP2 data receive or Secure Digital2 data1. At reset, this pin is
configured as McBSP2.DR.
McBSP2.DR I McBSP2 serial data receive. McBSP2.DR is selected when the External
Bus Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field or following
reset. Input
SD2.DAT1 I/O/Z SD2 data1 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register has 10 in
the Serial Port2 Mode bit field.
S22 I/O/Z McBSP2 receive frame synchronization or Secure Digital2 data2. At reset,
this pin is configured as McBSP2.FSR.
McBSP2.FSR I McBSP2 receive frame synchronization. The McBSP2.FSR pulse initiates
the data receive process over McBSP2.DR. Input
SD2.DAT2 I/O/Z SD2 data2 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register has 10 in
the Serial Port2 Mode bit field.
S23 O/Z McBSP2 data transmit or MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital2 serial clock. At
reset, this pin is configured as McBSP2.DX.
McBSP2.DX O/Z
McBSP2 serial data transmit. McBSP2.DX is placed in the
high-impedance state when not transmitting, when RESET is asserted, or
when OFF is low. McBSP2.DX is selected when the External Bus
Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field or following
reset.
BK Hi-Z
MMC2.CLK
SD2.CLK OMMC2 or SD2 serial clock is selected when the External Bus Selection
Register has 10 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field.
S24 I/O/Z McBSP2 transmit clock or MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital2 data0. At
reset, this pin is configured as McBSP2.CLKX.
McBSP2.CLKX I/O/Z
McBSP2 transmit clock. McBSP2.CLKX serves as the serial shift clock f o r
the serial port transmitter. The McBSP2.CLKX pin is configured as input
after reset. McBSP2.CLKX is selected when the External Bus Selection
Register has 00 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field or following reset.
H Input
MMC2.DAT
SD2.DAT0 I/O/Z MMC2 or SD2 data0 pin is selected when the External Bus Selection
Register has 10 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field.
S25 I/O/Z McBSP2 transmit frame synchronization or Secure Digital2 data3. At
reset, this pin is configured as McBSP2.FSX.
McBSP2.FSX I/O/Z
McBSP2 frame synchronization. The McBSP2.FSX pulse initiates the
data transmit process over McBSP2.DX. McBSP2.FSX is configured as
an input following reset. McBSP1.FSX is selected when the External Bus
Selection Register has 00 in the Serial Port2 Mode bit field or following
reset.
Input
SD2.DAT3 I/O/Z SD2 data3 is selected when the External Bus Selection Register has 10 in
the Serial Port2 Mode bit field.
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
17
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
USB
DP I/O/Z Differential (positive) receive/transmit. At reset, this pin is configured as
input. Input
DN I/O/Z Differential (negative) receive/transmit. At reset, this pin is configured as
input. Input
PU O/Z Pullup output. This pin is used to pull up the detection resistor required by
the USB specification. The pin is internally connected to USBVDD via a
software controllable switch (CONN bit of the USBCTL register). Output
A/D
AIN0 I Analog Input Channel 0 Input
AIN1 I Analog Input Channel 1 Input
AIN2 (BGA only) IAnalog Input Channel 2. (BGA package only) Input
AIN3 (BGA only) IAnalog Input Channel 3. (BGA package only) Input
TEST/EMULATION PINS
TCK I
IEEE standard 1149.1 test clock. TCK is normally a free-running clock
signal with a 50% duty cycle. The changes on test access port (TAP) of
input signals TMS and TDI are clocked into the TAP controller, instruction
register, or sel e ct e d t e s t data register on the rising edge of TCK. Changes
at the TAP output signal (TDO) occur on the falling edge of TCK.
PU
H
FS Input
TDI I IEEE standard 1149.1 test data input. Pin with internal pullup device. TDI is
clocked into the selected register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of
TCK.
PU
FS Input
TDO O/Z
IEEE standard 1149.1 test data output. The contents of the selected
register (instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of
TCK. TDO is in the high-impedance state except when the scanning of
data is in progress.
Hi-Z
TMS I IEEE standard 1149.1 test mode select. Pin with internal pullup device.
This serial control input is clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge
of TCK.
PU
FS Input
TRST I
IEEE standard 1149.1 test reset. TRST, when high, gives the IEEE
standard 1149.1 scan system control of the operations of the device. If
TRST is not connected or driven low, the device operates in its functional
mode, and the IEEE standard 1149.1 signals are ignored. This pin has an
internal pulldown.
PD Input
EMU0 I/O/Z
Emulator 0 pin. When TRST is driven low, EMU0 must be high for
activation o f the OFF condition. When TRST is driven high, EMU0 is used
as an interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as I/O by way
of the IEEE standard 1149.1 scan system.
PU Input
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Introduction
18 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 2−3. Signal Descriptions (Continued)
TERMINAL
NAME RESET
CONDITION
BK‡
FUNCTIONI/O/Z†
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL NAME
TEST/EMULATION PINS (CONTINUED)
EMU1/OFF I/O/Z
Emulator 1 pin/disable all outputs. When TRST is driven high, EMU1/OFF
is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as I/O
by way of IEEE standard 1149.1 scan system. When TRST is driven low,
EMU1/OFF is configured as OFF. The EMU1/OFF signal, when
active-low, puts all output drivers into the high-impedance state. Note that
OFF is used exclusively for testing and emulation purposes (not for
multiprocessing applications). Therefore, for the OFF condition, the
following apply: TRST = low, EMU0 = high, EMU1/OFF = low
PU Input
SUPPLY PINS
CVDD SDigital Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply for the core CPU.
DVDD SDigital Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply for the I/O pins.
USBVDD SDigital Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply for the I/O of the USB
module (DP, DN , and PU)
RDVDD SDigital Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply for the I/O pins of the RTC
module.
RCVDD SDigital Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply for the RTC module
AVDD SAnalog Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply for the 10-bit A/D.
ADVDD SAnalog Digital Power , + V DD. Dedicated power supply for the digital portion
of the 10-bit A/D.
USBPLLVDD SDigital Power, + VDD. Dedicated power supply pin for the USB PLL.
VSS SDigital Ground. Dedicated ground for the I/O and core pins.
AVSS SAnalog Ground. Dedicated ground for the 10-bit A/D.
ADVSS SAnalog Digital Ground. Dedicated ground for the digital portion of the10-bit
A/D.
USBPLLVSS SDigital Ground. Dedicated ground for the USB PLL.
MISCELLANEOUS
NC No connection
†I = Input, O = Output, S = Supply, Hi-Z = High-impedance
‡BK = bus keeper (the bus keeper maintains the previous voltage level during reset or while the output pin is not driven), PU = pullup,
PD = pulldown, H = hysterisis input buffer, FS = fail-safe buffer
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
19
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3 Functional Overview
The following functional overview is based on the block diagram in Figure 3−1.
†
†
†
7/9
USB PLL
†Number of pins determined by package type.
Figure 3−1. Block Diagram of the TMS320VC5509A
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
20 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.1 Memory
The 5509A supports a unified memory map (program and data accesses are made to the same physical
space). The total on-chip memory is 320K bytes (128K 16-bit words of RAM and 32K 16-bit words of ROM).
3.1.1 On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM)
The DARAM is located in the byte address range 000000h−00FFFFh and is composed of eight blocks of
8K bytes each (see Table 3−1). Each DARAM block can perform two accesses per cycle (two reads, two
writes, or a read and a write). DARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses. The
HPI can only access the first four (32K bytes) DARAM blocks.
Table 3−1. DARAM Blocks
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE MEMORY BLOCK
000000h − 001FFFh DARAM 0 (HPI accessible)†
002000h − 003FFFh DARAM 1 (HPI accessible)
004000h − 005FFFh DARAM 2 (HPI accessible)
006000h − 007FFFh DARAM 3 (HPI accessible)
008000h − 009FFFh DARAM 4
00A000h − 00BFFFh DARAM 5
00C000h − 00DFFFh DARAM 6
00E000h − 00FFFFh DARAM 7
†First 192 bytes are reserved for Memory-Mapped Registers (MMRs).
3.1.2 On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM)
The SARAM is located at the byte address range 010000h−03FFFFh and is composed of 24 blocks of 8K bytes
each (see Table 3−2). Each SARAM block can perform one access per cycle (one read or one write). SARAM
can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses.
Table 3−2. SARAM Blocks
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE MEMORY BLOCK BYTE ADDRESS RANGE MEMORY BLOCK
010000h − 011FFFh SARAM 0 028000h − 029FFFh SARAM 12
012000h − 013FFFh SARAM 1 02A000h − 02BFFFh SARAM 13
014000h − 015FFFh SARAM 2 02C000h − 02DFFFh SARAM 14
016000h − 017FFFh SARAM 3 02E000h − 02FFFFh SARAM 15
018000h − 019FFFh SARAM 4 030000h − 031FFFh SARAM 16
01A000h − 01BFFFh SARAM 5 032000h − 033FFFh SARAM 17
01C000h − 01DFFFh SARAM 6 034000h − 035FFFh SARAM 18
01E000h − 01FFFFh SARAM 7 036000h − 037FFFh SARAM 19
020000h − 021FFFh SARAM 8 038000h − 039FFFh SARAM 20
022000h − 023FFFh SARAM 9 03A000h − 03BFFFh SARAM 21
024000h − 025FFFh SARAM 10 03C000h − 03DFFFh SARAM 22
026000h − 027FFFh SARAM 11 03E000h − 03FFFFh SARAM 23
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
21
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.1.3 On-Chip Read-Only Memory (ROM)
The one-wait-state ROM is located at the byte address range FF0000h−FFFFFFh. The ROM is composed
of one block of 32K bytes and two 16K-byte blocks, for a total of 64K bytes of ROM. The ROM address space
can be mapped by software to the external memory or to the internal ROM. The 16K ROM blocks at FFC000
to FFFFFF can be configured as secure ROM. (See Section 3.1.4.)
NOTE: Customers can arrange to have the 5509A ROM programmed with contents unique
to any particular application. Contact your local Texas Instruments representative for more
information on custom ROM programming.
The standard 5509A device includes a bootloader program resident in the ROM. When the MPNMC bit field
of the ST3 status register is set through software, the on-chip ROM is disabled and not present in the memory
map, and byte address range FF0000h−FFFFFFh is directed to external memory space. A hardware reset
always clears the MPNMC bit, so it is not possible to disable the ROM at reset. However, the software reset
instruction does not affect the MPNMC bit. All three ROM blocks can be accessed by the program, data, or
DMA buses. The first 16-bit word access to ROM requires three cycles. Subsequent accesses require two
cycles per 16-bit word.
3.1.4 Secure ROM
Included in this 64K-byte ROM is a 16K-byte secure ROM (SROM) that is mapped into the memory space at
reset. This 16K-byte SROM is mapped out of the memory space by writing a “1” to the SROM disable bit field
of the Secure ROM Register (0x7C00) as shown in Figure 3−2. When the SROM disable bit is set, its setting
cannot be changed and the CPU or peripherals cannot access the on-chip SROM memory space. This ROM
block is not programmed on standard 5509A devices, but can be used to implement a custom, secure bootload
feature. Contact your local Texas Instruments representative for more information on custom ROM
programming.
(16K Bytes)
FF0000h
FF8000h
FFC000h SROM
(If SROM= 0 & MPNMC=0)
FFFFFFh
FF0000h
FF8000h
FFC000h
FFFFFFh
FF0000h
FF8000h
FFC000h
FFFFFFh
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ROM
(If MPNMC=0)
ROM
(If MPNMC=0)
External − CE3
(If MPNMC=1)
External − CE3
(If MPNMC=1)
External − CE3
(If MPNMC=1)
ROM
(If MPNMC=0)
ROM
(If MPNMC=0)
15 10
SROM=0 SROM=1
SROM
Secure ROM Register
No access
(If SROM=1 & MPNMC=0)
Byte
Address Byte
Address Byte
Address
(32K Bytes) (32K Bytes)
(16K Bytes) (16K Bytes)
(16K Bytes)
(16K Bytes)
(32K Bytes)
(16K Bytes)
Figure 3−2. Secure ROM
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
22 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.1.5 Memory Map
The 5509A provides 16M bytes of total memory space composed of on-cip RAM, on-chip ROM, and external
memory space supporting a variety of memory types. The on-chip, dual-access RAM allows two accesses
to a given block during the same cycle. The 5509A supports 8 blocks of 8K bytes of dual-access RAM. The
on-chip, single-access RAM allows one access to a given block per clock cycle. The 5509A supports
24 blocks of 8K byte of single-access RAM.
The remainder of the memory map is external space that is divided into four spaces. Each space has a chip
enable decode signal (called CE) that indicates an access to the selected space. The External Memory
Interface (EMIF) supports access to asynchronous memories such as SRAM and Flash, and synchronous
DRAM.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
23
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.1.5.1 PGE Package Memory Map
The PGE package features 14 address bits representing 16K-byte linear address for asynchronous memories
per CE space. Due to address row/column multiplexing, address reach for SDRAM devices is 4M bytes for
each CE space. The largest SDRAM device that can be used with the 5509A in a PGE package is 128M-bit
SDRAM.
000000
DARAM / HPI Access (32K − 192) Bytes
008000
DARAM‡32K Bytes
010000
SARAM§192K Bytes
External¶ − CE0
040000
400000
800000
C00000
FF0000
FF8000
32K Bytes
FFC000
(if SROM=0 &
MPNMC=0) 16K Bytes
16K Bytes
F
FFFFF
External¶ − CE1
External¶ − CE2
External¶ − CE3
Block Size
Byte Address
(Hex)†
SROM||
(if MPNMC=0)
ROM||
(if MPNMC=0)
ROM|| (if MPNMC=1)
External¶ − CE3
(if MPNMC=1)
External¶ − CE3
(if MPNMC=1)
External¶ − CE3
16K Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − SDRAM (MPNMC = 1)
4M Bytes − 64K Bytes if internal ROM selected (MPNMC = 0)
16K Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − SDRAM
16K Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − SDRAM
16K Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − 256K Bytes SDRAM#
Memory Blocks
†Address shown represents the first byte address in each block.
‡Dual-access RAM (DARAM): two accesses per cycle per block, 8 blocks of 8K bytes.
§Single-access RAM (SARAM): one access per cycle per block, 24 blocks of 8K bytes.
¶External memory spaces are selected by the chip-enable signal shown (CE[0:3]). Supported memory types include: asynchronous static
RAM (SRAM) and synchronous DRAM (SDRAM).
#The minus 256K bytes consists of 32K-byte DARAM/HPI access, 32K-byte DARAM, and 192K-byte SARAM.
|| Read-only memory (ROM): one access every two cycles, two blocks of 32K bytes.
0000C0 MMR (Reserved)
Figure 3−3. TMS320VC5509A Memory Map (PGE Package)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
24 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.1.5.2 GHH Package Memory Map
The GHH package features 21 address bits representing 2M-byte linear address for asynchronous memories
per CE space. Due to address row/column multiplexing, address reach for SDRAM devices is 4M bytes for
each CE space. The largest SDRAM device that can be used with the 5509A in a GHH package is 128M-bit
SDRAM.
000000
DARAM / HPI Access (32K − 192) Bytes
008000
DARAM‡32K Bytes
010000
SARAM§192K Bytes
External¶ − CE0
040000
400000
800000
C00000
FF0000
FF8000
32K Bytes
FFC000
(if SROM=0 &
MPNMC=0) 16K Bytes
16K Bytes
F
FFFFF
External¶ − CE1
External¶ − CE2
External¶ − CE3
Block Size
Byte Address
(Hex)†
SROM||
(if MPNMC=0)
ROM||
(if MPNMC=0)
ROM|| (if MPNMC=1)
External¶ − CE3
(if MPNMC=1)
External¶ − CE3
(if MPNMC=1)
External¶ − CE3
2M Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − SDRAM (MPNMC = 1)
4M Bytes − 64K Bytes if internal ROM selected (MPNMC = 0)
2M Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − SDRAM
2M Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − SDRAM
2M Bytes − Asynchronous
4M Bytes − 256K Bytes SDRAM#
Memory Blocks
†Address shown represents the first byte address in each block.
‡Dual-access RAM (DARAM): two accesses per cycle per block, 8 blocks of 8K bytes.
§Single-access RAM (SARAM): one access per cycle per block, 24 blocks of 8K bytes.
¶External memory spaces are selected by the chip-enable signal shown (CE[0:3]). Supported memory types include: asynchronous static
RAM (SRAM) and synchronous DRAM (SDRAM).
#The minus 256K bytes consists of 32K-byte DARAM/HPI access, 32K-byte DARAM, and 192K-byte SARAM.
|| Read-only memory (ROM): one access every two cycles, two blocks of 32K bytes.
0000C0 MMR (Reserved)
Figure 3−4. TMS320VC5509A Memory Map (GHH Package)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
25
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.1.6 Boot Configuration
The on-chip bootloader provides a method to transfer application code and tables from an external source to
the on-chip RAM memory at power up. These options include:
•Enhanced host-port interface (HPI) in multiplexed or nonmultiplexed mode
•External asynchronous memory boot (via the EMIF) from 8-bit-wide or 16-bit-wide memory
•Serial port boot (from McBSP0) with 8-bit or 16-bit data length
•Serial EPROM boot (from McBSP0) supporting EPROMs with 16-bit or 24-bit address
•USB boot
•I2C EEPROM
•Direct execution from external 16-bit-wide asynchronous memory
External pins select the boot configuration. The values of GPIO[3:0] are sampled, following reset, upon
execution of the on-chip bootloader code. It is not possible to disable the bootloader at reset because the
5509A always starts execution from the on-chip ROM following a hardware reset. A summary of boot
configurations is shown in Table 3−3. For more information on using the bootloader, see the Using the
TMS320C5509/C5509A Bootloader application report (literature number SPRA375).
Table 3−3. Boot Configuration Summary
GPIO0 GPIO3 GPIO2 GPIO1 BOOT MODE PROCESS
0 0 0 0 Reserved
0 0 0 1 Serial (SPI) EPROM Boot (24-bit address) via McBSP0
0 0 1 0 USB
0 0 1 1 I2C EEPROM (7-bit address)
0 1 0 0 Reserved
0 1 0 1 HPI – multiplexed mode
0 1 1 0 HPI – nonmultiplexed mode
0 1 1 1 Reserved
1 0 0 0 Execute from 16-bit-wide asynchronous memory (on CE1 space)
1 0 0 1 Serial (SPI) EPROM Boot (16-bit address) via McBSP0
1 0 1 0 8-bit asynchronous memory (on CE1 space)
1 0 1 1 16-bit asynchronous memory (on CE1 space)
1 1 0 0 Reserved
1 1 0 1 Reserved
1 1 1 0 Standard serial boot via McBSP0 (16-bit data)
1 1 1 1 Standard serial boot via McBSP0 (8-bit data)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
26 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.2 Peripherals
The 5509A supports the following peripherals:
•A Configurable Parallel External Interface supporting either:
− 16-bit external memory interface (EMIF) for asynchronous memory and/or SDRAM
− 16-bit enhanced host-port interface (HPI)
•A six-channel direct memory access (DMA) controller
•A programmable digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) clock generator
•Two 20-bit timers
•Watchdog Timer
•Three serial ports supporting a combination of:
− up to three multichannel buffered serial ports (McBSPs)
− up to two MultiMedia/Secure Digital Card Interfaces
•Seven (LQFP) or Eight (BGA) configurable general-purpose I/O pins
•64-bit Unique Device ID
•USB 2.0 full-speed slave interface supporting:
− Bulk
− Interrupt
− Isochronous
•I2C multi-master and slave interface (I2C compatible except, no fail-safe I/O buffers)
•Real-time clock with crystal input, separate clock domain and supply pins
•4-channel (BGA) or 2-channel (LQFP)10-bit Successive Approximation A/D
For detailed information on the C55x DSP peripherals, see the following documents:
•TMS320C55x DSP Functional Overview (literature number SPRU312)
•TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU317)
3.3 Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller
The 5509A DMA provides the following features:
•Four standard ports, one for each of the following data resources: DARAM, SARAM, Peripherals and
External Memory
•Six channels, which allow the DMA controller to track the context of six independent DMA channels
•Programmable low/high priority for each DMA channel
•One interrupt for each DMA channel
•Event synchronization. DMA transfers in each channel can be dependent on the occurrence of selected
events.
•Programmable address modification for source and destination addresses
•Dedicated Idle Domain allows the DMA controller to be placed in a low-power (idle) state under software
control.
•Dedicated DMA channel used by the HPI to access internal memory (DARAM)
The 5509A DMA controller allows transfers to be synchronized to selected events. The 5509A supports
21 separate sync events and each channel can be tied to separate sync events independent of the other
channels. Sync events are selected by programming the SYNC field in the channel-specific DMA Channel
Control Register (DMA_CCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
27
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.3.1 DMA Channel Control Register (DMA_CCR)
The channel control register (DMA_CCR) bit layouts are shown in Figure 3−5.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DST AMODE SRC AMODE END PROG Reserved REPEAT AUTO INIT
R/W, 00 R/W, 00 R/W, 0 R, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
7654 0
EN PRIO FS SYNC
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 00000
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−5. DMA_CCR Bit Locations
The SYNC[4:0] bits specify the event that can initiate the DMA transfer for the corresponding DMA channel.
The five bits allow several configurations as listed in Table 3−4. The bits are set to zero upon reset. For those
synchronization modes with more than one peripheral listed, the Serial Port Mode bit field of the External Bus
Selection Register dictates which peripheral event is actually connected to the DMA input.
Table 3−4. Synchronization Control Function
SYNC FIELD IN
DMA_CCR SYNCHRONIZATION MODE
00000b No event synchronized
00001b McBSP 0 Receive Event (REVT0)
00010b McBSP 0 Transmit Event (XEVT0)
00011b Reserved. These bits should always be written with 0.
00100b Reserved. These bits should always be written with 0.
00101b
McBSP1/MMC−SD1 Receive Event
Serial Port 1 Mode:
00 = McBSP1 Receive Event (REVT1)
01 = MMC/SD1 Receive Event (RMMCEVT1)
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved
00110b
McBSP1/MMC−SD1 Transmit Event
Serial Port 1 Mode:
00 = McBSP1 Transmit Event (XEVT1)
01 = MMC/SD1 Transmit Event (XMMCEVT1)
10 = Reserved
11 = reserved
00111b Reserved. These bits should always be written with 0.
01000b Reserved. These bits should always be written with 0.
01001b
McBSP2/MMC−SD2 Receive Event
Serial Port 2 Mode:
00 = McBSP2 Receive Event (REVT2)
01 = MMC/SD2 Receive Event (RMMCEVT2)
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved
†The I2C receive event (REVTI2C) and external interrupt 4 (INT4) share a synchronization input to the DMA. When the SYNC field of the
DMA_CCR is set to 10011b, the logical OR of these two sources is used for DMA synchronization.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
28 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−4. Synchronization Control Function (Continued)
SYNC FIELD IN
DMA_CCR SYNCHRONIZATION MODE
01010b
McBSP2/MMC−SD2 Transmit Event
Serial Port 2 Mode:
00 = McBSP2 Transmit Event (XEVT2)
01 = MMC/SD2 Transmit Event (XMMCEVT2)
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved
01011b Reserved. These bits should always be written with 0.
01100b Reserved. These bits should always be written with 0.
01101b Timer 0 Interrupt Event
01110b Timer 1 Interrupt Event
01111b External Interrupt 0
10000b External Interrupt 1
10001b External Interrupt 2
10010b External Interrupt 3
10011b External Interrupt 4 / I2C Receive Event (REVTI2C)†
10100b I2C Transmit Event (XEVTI2C)
Other values Reserved (Do not use these values)
†The I2C receive event (REVTI2C) and external interrupt 4 (INT4) share a synchronization input to the DMA. When the SYNC field of the
DMA_CCR is set to 10011b, the logical OR of these two sources is used for DMA synchronization.
3.4 I2C Interface
The TMS320VC5509A includes an I2C serial port. The I2C port supports:
•Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
•Operates at 100 Kbps or 400 Kbps
•7-bit addressing mode
•Master (transmit/receive) and slave (transmit/receive) modes of operation
•Events: DMA, interrupt, or polling
The I2C module clock must be in the range from 7 MHz to 12 MHz. This is necessary for proper operation of
the I2C module. With the I2C module clock in this range, the noise filters on the SDA and SCL pins suppress
noise that has a duration of 50 ns or shorter. The I2C module clock is derived from the DSP clock divided by
a programmable prescaler.
NOTE: I/O buffers are not fail-safe. The SDA and SCL pins could potentially draw current if the
device is powered down and SDA and SCL are driven by other devices connected to the I2C bus.
3.5 Configurable External Buses
The 5509A o ffers several combinations of configurations for its external parallel port and two serial ports. This
allows the system designer to choose the appropriate media interface for its application without the need of
a large-pin-count package. The External Bus Selection Register controls the routing of the parallel and serial
port signals.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
29
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.5.1 External Bus Selection Register (EBSR)
The External Bus Selection Register determines the mapping of the 14 (LQFP) or 21 (BGA) address signals,
16 data signals, and 15 control signals of the external parallel port. It also determines the mapping of the
McBSP or MMC/SD ports to Serial Port1 and Serial Port2. The External Bus Selection Register is
memory-mapped at port address 0x6C00. Once the bit fields of this register are changed, the routing of the
signals takes place on the next CPU clock cycle.
The reset value of the parallel port mode bit field is determined by the state of the GPIO0 pin at reset. If GPIO0
is high at reset, the full EMIF mode is enabled and the parallel port mode bit field is set to 01. If GPIO0 is low
at reset, the HPI multiplexed mode is enabled and the parallel port mode bit field is set to 11.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
CLKOUT
Disable OSC Disable HIDL BKE SR STAT HOLD HOLDA CKE SEL
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W , 1 R/W, 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CKE EN SR CMD Serial Port2
Mode Serial Port1
Mode Parallel Port
Mode
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 00 R/W, 00 R/W, 01 if GPIO0 = 1
11 if GPIO0 = 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−6. External Bus Selection Register
Table 3−5. External Bus Selection Register Bit Field Description
BITS DESCRIPTION
15 CLKOUT disable.
CLKOUT disable = 0: CLKOUT enabled
CLKOUT disable = 1: CLKOUT disabled
14 Oscillator disable. Works with IDLE instruction to put the clock generation domain into IDLE mode.
OSC disable = 0: Oscillator enabled
OSC disable = 1: Oscillator disabled
13
Host mode idle bit. (Applicable only if the parallel bus is configured as EHPI.)
When the parallel bus is set to EHPI mode, the clock domain is not allowed to go to idle, so a host processor can
access the DSP internal memory. The HIDL bit works around this restriction and allows the DSP to idle the clock
domain and the EHPI. When the clock domain is in idle, a host processor will not be able to access the DSP
memory.
HIDL = 0: Host access to DSP enabled. Idling EHPI and clock domain is not allowed.
HIDL = 1: Idles the HPI and the clock domain upon execution of the IDLE instruction when the parallel
port mode is set to 10 or 11 selecting HPI mode. In addition, bit 4 of the Idle Control Register
must be set to 1 prior to the execution of the IDLE instruction.
12 Bus keep enable.†
BKE = 0: Bus keeper, pullups/pulldowns
BKE = 1: Bus keeper, pullups/pulldowns
†Function available when the port or pins configured as input.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
30 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−5. External Bus Selection Register Bit Field Description (Continued)
BITS DESCRIPTION
11 SDRAM self-refresh status bit.
SR STAT = 0: SDRAM self-refresh signal is not asserted.
SR STAT = 1: SDRAM self-refresh signal is asserted
10
EMIF hold
HOLD = 0: DSP drives the extermal memory bus
HOLD = 1: Request the external memory bus to be placed in high-impedance so that another device can
drive the memory bus
9
EMIF hold acknowledge.
HOLDA = 0: DSP indicates that a hold request on the external memory bus has occured, the EMIF
completed any pending external bus activity, and placed the external memory bus signals in
high-impedance state (address bus, data bus, CE[3:0], AOE, A WE, ARE, SDRAS, SDCAS,
SDWE, SDA10, CLKMEM). Once this bit is cleared, and external device can drive the bus.
HOLDA = 1: No hold acknowledge
8SDRAM CKE pin selection bit.
CKE SEL = 0: Use XF for SDRAM CKE signal
CKE SEL = 1: Use GPIO.4 for SDRAM CKE signal
7SDRAM CKE enable bit.
CKE EN = 0: XF or GPIO.4 operates in normal mode
CKE EN = 1: Base on the CKE SEL bit, either XF or GPIO.4 drives the SDRAM CKE pin
6SDRAM self-refresh command.
SR CMD = 0: EMIF will not issue a SDRAM self-refresh command
SR CMD = 1: EMIF will issue a SDRAM self-refresh command
5−4
Serial port2 mode. McBSP2 or MMC/SD2 Mode. Determines the mode of Serial Port2.
Serial Port2 Mode = 00: McBSP2 mode. The McBSP2 signals are routed to the six pins of Seral Port2.
Serial Port2 Mode = 01: MMC/SD2 mode. The MMC/SD2 signals are routed to the six pins of Seral Port2.
Serial Port2 Mode = 10: Reserved
Serial Port2 Mode = 11: Reserved.
3−2
Serial port1 mode. McBSP1 or MMC/SD1 Mode. Determines the mode of Serial Port1.
Serial Port1 Mode = 00: McBSP1 mode. The McBSP1 signals are routed to the six pins of Seral Port1.
Serial Port1 Mode = 01: MMC/SD1 mode. The MMC/SD1 signals are routed to the six pins of Seral Port1.
Serial Port1 Mode = 10: Reserved
Serial Port1 Mode = 11: Reserved.
1−0
Parallel port mode. EMIF/HPI/GPIO Mode. Determines the mode of the parallel port.
Parallel Port Mode = 00: Data EMIF mode. The 16 EMIF data signals and 13 EMIF control signals are
routed to the corresponding external parallel bus data and control signals. The
14 (LQFP) or 16 (BGA) address bus signals can be used as general-purpose I/O
only.
Parallel Port Mode = 01: Full EMIF mode. The 14 (LQFP) or 21 (BGA) address signals, 16 data signals, and
15 control signals are routed to the corresponding external parallel bus address,
data, and control signals.
Parallel Port Mode = 10: Non-multiplexed HPI mode. The HPI is enabled an its 14 address signals,
16 data signals, and 7 control signals are routed to the corresponding address,
data, control signals of the external parallel bus. Moreover, 8 control signals of the
external parallel bus are used as general-purpose I/O.
Parallel Port Mode = 11: Multiplexed HPI mode. The HPI is enabled and its 16 data signals and
10 control signals are routed to the external parallel bus. In addition, 3 control
signals of the external parallel bus are used as general-purpose I/O. The
14 (LQFP) or 16 (BGA) external parallel port address bus signals are used as
general-purpose I/O.
†Function available when the port or pins configured as input.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
31
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.5.2 Parallel Port
The parallel port of the 5509A consists of 14 (LQFP) or 21 (BGA) address signals, 16 data signals, and 15
control signals. Its 14 bits for address allow it to access 16K (LQFP) or 2M bytes of external memory when
using the asynchronous SRAM interface. On the other hand, the SDRAM interface can access the whole
external memory space of 16M bytes. The parallel bus supports four different modes:
•Full EMIF mode: the EMIF with its 14 (LQFP) or 21 address signals, 16 data signals, and 15 control
signals routed to the corresponding external parallel bus address, data, and control signals.
•Data EMIF mode: the EMIF with its 16 data signals, and 15 control signals routed to the corresponding
external parallel bus data and control signals. The 14 (LQFP) or 16 (BGA) address bus signals can be
used as general-purpose I/O signals only.
•Non-multiplexed HPI mode: the HPI is enabled with its 14 address signals, 16 data signals, and
8 control signals routed to the corresponding address, data, and control signals of the external parallel
bus. Moreover, 7 control signals of the external parallel bus are used as general-purpose I/O.
•Multiplexed HPI mode: the HPI is enabled with its 16 data signals and 10 control signals routed to the
external parallel bus. In addition, 5 control signals of the external parallel bus are used as general-purpose
I/O. The external parallel port’s 14 (LQFP) or 16 (BGA) address signals are used as general-purpose I/O.
Table 3−6. TMS320VC5509A Parallel Port Signal Routing
Pin Signal Data EMIF (00)†Full EMIF (01)†Non-Multiplex HPI (10)†Multiplex HPI (11)†
Address Bus
A’[0] N/A EMIF.A[0] (BGA) N/A N/A
A[0]
GPIO.A[0] (LQFP) EMIF.A[0] (LQFP) HPI.HA[0] (LQFP) GPIO.A[0] (LQFP)
A[0]
GPIO.A[0] (BGA) HPI.HA[0] (BGA) GPIO.A[0] (BGA)
A[13:1]
GPIO.A[13:1] (LQFP) EMIF.A[13:1] (LQFP) HPI.HA[13:1] (LQFP) GPIO.A[13:1] (LQFP)
A[13:1]
GPIO.A[13:1] (BGA) EMIF.A[13:1] (BGA) HPI.HA[13:1] (BGA) GPIO.A[13:1] (BGA)
A[15:14] GPIO.A[15:14] (BGA) EMIF.A[15:14] (BGA) N/A GPIO.A[15:14] (BGA)
A[20:16]‡EMIF.A[20:16] (BGA) EMIF.A[20:16] (BGA) N/A N/A
Data Bus
D[15:0] EMIF.D[15:0] EMIF.D[15:0] HPI.HD[15:0] HPI.HD[15:0]
Control Bus
C0 EMIF.ARE EMIF.ARE GPIO8 GPIO8
C1 EMIF.AOE EMIF.AOE HPI.HINT HPI.HINT
C2 EMIF.AWE EMIF.AWE HPI.HR/W HPI.HR/W
C3 EMIF.ARDY EMIF.ARDY HPI.HRDY HPI.HRDY
C4 EMIF.CE0 EMIF.CE0 GPIO9 GPIO9
C5 EMIF.CE1 EMIF.CE1 GPIO10 GPIO10
C6 EMIF.CE2 EMIF.CE2 HPI.HCNTL0 HPI.HCNTL0
C7 EMIF.CE3 EMIF.CE3 GPIO11 HPI.HCNTL1
C8 EMIF.BE0 EMIF.BE0 HPI.HBE0 HPI.HBE0
C9 EMIF.BE1 EMIF.BE1 HPI.HBE1 HPI.HBE1
C10 EMIF.SDRAS EMIF.SDRAS GPIO12 HPI.HAS
C11 EMIF.SDCAS EMIF.SDCAS HPI.HCS HPI.HCS
C12 EMIF.SDWE EMIF.SDWE HPI.HDS1 HPI.HDS1
C13 EMIF.SDA10 EMIF.SDA10 GPIO13 GPIO13
C14 EMIF.CLKMEM EMIF.CLKMEM HPI.HDS2 HPI.HDS2
†Represents the Parallel Port Mode bits of the External Bus Selection Register.
‡A[20:16] of the BGA package always functions as EMIF address pins and they cannot be reconfigured for any other function.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
32 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.5.3 Parallel Port Signal Routing
The 5509A allows access to 16-bit-wide (read and write) or 8-bit-wide (read only) asynchronous memory and
16-bit-wide SDRAM. For 16-bit-wide memories, EMIF.A[0] is kept low and is not used. To provide as many
address pins as possible, the 5509A routes the parallel port signals as shown in Figure 3−7.
Figure 3−7 shows the addition of the A′[0] signal in the BGA package. This pin is used for asynchronous
memory interface only, while the A[0] pin is used with HPI or GPIO. Figure 3−8 summarizes the use of the
parallel port signals for memory interfacing.
EMIF.A[0]
GPIO.A[0]
HPI.HA[0]
EMIF.A[13:1]
HPI.HA[13:1]
GPIO.A[13:1]
EMIF.A[14]
GPIO.A[14]
EMIF.A[15]
GPIO.A[15]
EMIF.A[20:16]
A’[0] (BGA only)
A[0]
A[13:1]
A[14] (BGA only)
A[15] (BGA only)
A[20:16] (BGA only)
Figure 3−7. Parallel Port Signal Routing
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
33
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
BE[1:0]
A[13:1]
A[0]
D[15:0]
A[12:0]
A[13]
D[15:0]
16-Bit
Asynchronous
Memory
5509A
LQFP
16-Bit-Wide Asynchronous Memory
BGA
5509A
A[20:14]
D[15:0]
A[13:1]
BE[1:0]
16-Bit
Asynchronous
Memory
D[15:0]
A[19:13]
A[12:0]
BGA
5509A
A’[0]
A[13:1]
A[20:14]
BE[1:0]
8-Bit-Wide Asynchronous Memory
5509A
LQFP
A[13:0]
D[7:0]
Memory
Asynchronous
8-Bit
A[0]
A[13:1]
A[20:14]
BE[1:0]
Memory
Asynchronous
8-Bit
A[13:0]
D[7:0]
D[7:0]D[7:0]
5509A
LQFP
CLKMEM
SDCAS
SDRAS
CEx
SDRAM
128 MB
64 MB or
CAS
CLK
RAS
CS
A[13]
A[0]
SDWE
BA[0]
BA[1]
DQM[H:L]
WE
A[12]
SDA10
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
A[11]
A[9:0]
D[15:0]
A[10]
16-Bit-Wide SDRAM
SDWE
A[12]
D[15:0]
A[10:1]
SDA10
A[13]
A[14]
5509A
BGA
SDCAS
SDRAS
CLKMEM
CEx
WE
A[11]
A[9:0]
D[15:0]
A[10]
BA[1]
BA[0]
DQM[H:L]
CAS
RAS
CLK
CS
BE[1:0]
BE[1:0]
BE[1:0]
BE[1:0]
OE OE
RE RE
WE WE
CEx CS
BE[1:0] BE[1:0]
OE OE
RE RE
WE WE
CEx CS
OE OE
RE RE
WE WE
CEx CS
OE OE
RE RE
WE WE
CEx CS
SDRAM
128 MB
64 MB or
Figure 3−8. Parallel Port (EMIF) Signal Interface
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
34 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.5.4 Serial Ports
The 5509A Serial Port1 and Serial Port2 each consists of six signals that support two different modes:
•McBSP mode: all six signals of the McBSP are routed to the six external signals of the serial port.
•MMC/SD mode: all six signals of the MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital port are routed to the six external
signals of the serial port.
Table 3−7. TMS320VC5509A Serial Port1 Signal Routing
PIN SIGNAL MCBSP1 (00)†MMC/SD1 (01)†
S10 McBSP1.CLKR MMC1.CMD
S11 McBSP1.DR MMC1.DAT1
S12 McBSP1.FSR MMC1.DAT2
S13 McBSP1.DX MMC1.CLK
S14 McBSP1.CLKX MMC1.DAT0
S15 McBSP1.FSX MMC1.DAT3
†Represents the Serial Port1 Mode bits of the External Bus Selection Register.
Table 3−8. TMS320VC5509A Serial Port2 Signal Routing
PIN SIGNAL MCBSP2 (00)‡MMC/SD2 (01)‡
S20 McBSP2.CLKR MMC2.CMD
S21 McBSP2.DR MMC2.DAT1
S22 McBSP2.FSR MMC2.DAT2
S23 McBSP2.DX MMC2.CLK
S24 McBSP2.CLKX MMC2.DAT0
S25 McBSP2.FSX MMC2.DAT3
‡Represents the Serial Port2 Mode bits of the External Bus Selection Register.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
35
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.6 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Ports
3.6.1 Dedicated General-Purpose I/O
The 5509A provides eight dedicated general-purpose input/output pins, GPIO0−GPIO7. Each pin can be
indepedently configured as an input or an output using the I/O Direction Register (IODIR). The I/O Data
Register (IODATA) is used to monitor the logic state of pins configured as inputs and control the logic state
of pins configured as outputs. See Table 3−28 for address information. The description of the IODIR is shown
in Figure 3−9 and Table 3−9. The description of IODATA is shown in Figure 3−10 and Table 3−10.
To configure a GPIO pin as an input, clear the direction bit that corresponds to the pin in IODIR to 0. To read
the logic state of the input pin, read the corresponding bit in IODATA.
To configure a GPIO pin as an output, set the direction bit that corresponds to the pin in IODIR to 1. To control
the logic state of the output pin, write to the corresponding bit in IODATA.
15 876543210
Reserved IO7DIR IO6DIR IO5DIR
(BGA) IO4DIR IO3DIR IO2DIR IO1DIR IO0DIR
R−00000000 R/W−0 R/W−0 R/W−0 R/W−0 R/W−0 R/W−0 R/W−0 R/W−0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−9. I/O Direction Register (IODIR) Bit Layout
Table 3−9. I/O Direction Register (IODIR) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−8 Reserved 0 These bits are reserved and are unaffected by writes.
7−0 IOxDIR†0IOx Direction Control Bit. Controls whether IOx operates as an input or an output.
IOxDIR = 0 IOx is configured as an input.
IOxDIR = 1 IOx is configured as an output.
†The GPIO5 pin is available on the BGA package only.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
36 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
15 876543210
Reserved IO7D IO6D IO5D
(BGA) IO4D IO3D IO2D IO1D IO0D
R−00000000 R/W−pin R/W−pin R/W−pin R/W−pin R/W−pin R/W−pin R/W−pin R/W−pin
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, pin = value present on the pin (IO7−IO0 default to inputs after reset)
Figure 3−10. I/O Data Register (IODATA) Bit Layout
Table 3−10. I/O Data Register (IODATA) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−8 Reserved 0 These bits are reserved and are unaffected by writes.
7−0 IOxD pin†‡
IOx Data Bit.
If IOx is configured as an input (IOxDIR = 0 in IODIR):
IOxD = 0 The signal on the IOx pin is low.
IOxD = 1 The signal on the IOx pin is high.
If IOx is configured as an output (IOxDIR = 1 in IODIR):
IOxD = 0 Drive the signal on the IOx pin low.
IOxD = 1 Drive the signal on the IOx pin high.
†The GPIO5 pin is available on the BGA package only.
‡pin = value present on the pin (IO7−IO0 default to inputs after reset)
3.6.2 Address Bus General-Purpose I/O
The 16 address signals, EMIF.A[15−0], can also be individually enabled as GPIO when the Parallel Port Mode
bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set for Data EMIF (00) or Multiplexed EHPI mode (11). These
pins are controlled by three registers: the enable register, AGPIOEN, determines if the pins serve as GPIO
or address (Figure 3−11); the direction register, AGPIODIR, determines if the GPIO enabled pin is an input
or output (Figure 3−12); and the data register, AGPIODATA, determines the logic states of the pins in
general-purpose I/O mode (Figure 3−13).
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
AIOEN15
(BGA) AIOEN14
(BGA) AIOEN13 AIOEN12 AIOEN11 AIOEN10 AIOEN9 AIOEN8
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
76543210
AIOEN7 AIOEN6 AIOEN5 AIOEN4 AIOEN3 AIOEN2 AIOEN1 AIOEN0
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−11. Address/GPIO Enable Register (AGPIOEN) Bit Layout
Table 3−11. Address/GPIO Enable Register (AGPIOEN) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−0 AIOENx 0
Enable or disable GPIO function of Address Bus of EMIF. AIOEN15 and AIOEN14 are only available in
BGA package.
AIOENx = 0 GPIO function of Ax line is disabled; i.e., Ax has address function.
AIOENx = 1 GPIO function of Ax line is enabled; i.e., Ax has GPIO function.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
37
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
AIODIR15
(BGA) AIODIR14
(BGA) AIODIR13 AIODIR12 AIODIR11 AIODIR10 AIODIR9 AIODIR8
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
76543210
AIODIR7 AIODIR6 AIODIR5 AIODIR4 AIODIR3 AIODIR2 AIODIR1 AIODIR0
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−12. Address/GPIO Direction Register (AGPIODIR) Bit Layout
Table 3−12. Address/GPIO Direction Register (AGPIODIR) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−0 AIODIRx 0
Data direction bits that configure the Address Bus configured as I/O pins as either input or output pins.
AIODIR15 and AIODIR14 are only available in BGA package.
AIODIRx = 0 Configure corresponding pin as an input.
AIODIRx = 1 Configure corresponding pin as an output.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
AIOD15 (BGA) AIOD14 (BGA) AIOD13 AIOD12 AIOD11 AIOD10 AIOD9 AIOD8
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
76543210
AIOD7 AIOD6 AIOD5 AIOD4 AIOD3 AIOD2 AIOD1 AIOD0
R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−13. Address/GPIO Data Register (AGPIODATA) Bit Layout
Table 3−13. Address/GPIO Data Register (AGPIODATA) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−0 AIODx 0
Data bits that are used to control the level of the Address Bus configured as I/O output pins, and to monitor
the level of the Address Bus configured as I/O input pins. AIOD15 and AIOD14 are only available in BGA
package.
If AIODIRn = 0, then:
AIODx = 0 Corresponding I/O pin is read as a low.
AIODx = 1 Corresponding I/O pin is read as a high.
If AIODIRn = 1, then:
AIODx = 0 Set corresponding I/O pin to low.
AIODx = 1 Set corresponding I/O pin to high.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
38 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.6.3 EHPI General-Purpose I/O
Six control lines of the External Parallel Bus can also be set as general-purpose I/O when the Parallel Port
Mode bit field of the External Bus Selection Register is set to Nonmultiplexed EHPI (10) or Multiplexed EHPI
mode (11). These pins are controlled by three registers: the enable register, EHPIGPIOEN, determines if the
pins serve as GPIO or address (Figure 3−14); the direction register, EHPIGPIODIR, determines if the GPIO
enabled pin is an input or output (Figure 3−15); and the data register, EHPIGPIODATA, determines the logic
states of the pins in GPIO mode (Figure 3−16).
15 6543210
Reserved GPIOEN13 GPIOEN12 GPIOEN11 GPIOEN10 GPIOEN9 GPIOEN8
R, 0000 0000 00 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W , 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−14. EHPI GPIO Enable Register (EHPIGPIOEN) Bit Layout
Table 3−14. EHPI GPIO Enable Register (EHPIGPIOEN) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−6 Reserved 0 Reserved
5−0 GPIOEN13−
GPIOEN8 0Enable or disable GPIO function of EHPI Control Bus.
GPIOENx = 0 GPIO function of GPIOx line is disabled
GPIOENx = 1 GPIO function of GPIOx line is enabled
15 6543210
Reserved GPIODIR13 GPIODIR12 GPIODIR11 GPIODIR10 GPIODIR9 GPIODIR8
R, 0000 0000 00 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W , 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−15. EHPI GPIO Direction Register (EHPIGPIODIR) Bit Layout
Table 3−15. EHPI GPIO Direction Register (EHPIGPIODIR) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−6 Reserved 0 Reserved
5−0 GPIODIR13−
GPIODIR8 0
Data direction bits that configure the EHPI Control Bus configured as I/O pins as either input or output
pins.
GPIODIRx = 0 Configure corresponding pin as an input.
GPIODIRx = 1 Configure corresponding pin as an output.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
39
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
15 6543210
Reserved GPIOD13 GPIOD12 GPIOD11 GPIOD10 GPIOD9 GPIOD8
R, 0000 0000 00 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W , 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0 R/W, 0
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−16. EHPI GPIO Data Register (EHPIGPIODATA) Bit Layout
Table 3−16. EHPI GPIO Data Register (EHPIGPIODATA) Bit Functions
BIT
NO. BIT
NAME RESET
VALUE FUNCTION
15−6 Reserved 0 Reserved
5−0 GPIOD13−
GPIOD8 0
Data bits that are used to control the level of the EHPI Control Bus configured as I/O output pins, and to
monitor the level of the EHPI Control Bus configured as I/O input pins.
If GPIODIRn = 0, then:
GPIODx = 0 Corresponding I/O pin is read as a low.
GPIODx = 1 Corresponding I/O pin is read as a high.
If GPIODIRn = 1, then:
GPIODx = 0 Set corresponding I/O pin to low .
GPIODx = 1 Set corresponding I/O pin to high.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
40 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.7 System Register
The system register (SYSR) provides control over certain device-specific functions. The register is located
at port address 07FDh.
15 8
Reserved
7320
Reserved CLKDIV
R/W
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−17. System Register Bit Locations
Table 3−17. System Register Bit Fields
BIT
FUNCTION
NUMBER NAME
FUNCTION
15−3 Reserved These bits are reserved and are unaffected by writes.
2−0
CLKDIV CLKOUT Divide Factor. Allows the clock present on the CLKOUT pin to be a divided-down version
of the internal CPU clock. This field does not affect the programming of the PLL.
CLKDIV 000 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 1
CLKDIV 001 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 2
CLKDIV 010 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 4
CLKDIV 011 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 6
CLKDIV 100 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 8
CLKDIV 101 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 10
CLKDIV 110 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 12
CLKDIV 111 = CLKOUT represents the CPU clock divided by 14
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
41
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.8 Memory-Mapped Registers
The 5509A has 78 memory-mapped CPU registers that are mapped in data memory space address 0h to 4Fh.
Table 3−18 provides a list of the CPU memory-mapped registers (MMRs) available. The corresponding
TMS320C54x (C54x) CPU registers are also indicated where applicable.
Table 3−18. CPU Memory-Mapped Registers
C55x
REGISTER C54x
REGISTER WORD ADDRESS
(HEX) DESCRIPTION BIT FIELD
IER0 IMR 00 Interrupt Enable Register 0 [15−0]
IFR0 IFR 01 Interrupt Flag Register 0 [15−0]
ST0_55 − 02 Status Register 0 for C55x [15−0]
ST1_55 − 03 Status Register 1 for C55x [15−0]
ST3_55 − 04 Status Register 3 for C55x [15−0]
− − 05 Reserved [15−0]
ST0 ST0 06 Status Register ST0 [15−0]
ST1 ST1 07 Status Register ST1 [15−0]
AC0L AL 08 Accumulator 0 [15−0]
AC0H AH 09 [31−16]
AC0G AG 0A [39−32]
AC1L BL OB Accumulator 1 [15−0]
AC1H BH 0C [31−16]
AC1G BG 0D [39−32]
T3 TREG 0E Temporary Register [15−0]
TRN0 TRN 0F Transition Register [15−0]
AR0 AR0 10 Auxiliary Register 0 [15−0]
AR1 AR1 11 Auxiliary Register 1 [15−0]
AR2 AR2 12 Auxiliary Register 2 [15−0]
AR3 AR3 13 Auxiliary Register 3 [15−0]
AR4 AR4 14 Auxiliary Register 4 [15−0]
AR5 AR5 15 Auxiliary Register 5 [15−0]
AR6 AR6 16 Auxiliary Register 6 [15−0]
AR7 AR7 17 Auxiliary Register 7 [15−0]
SP SP 18 Stack Pointer Register [15−0]
BK03 BK 19 Circular Buffer Size Register [15−0]
BRC0 BRC 1A Block Repeat Counter [15−0]
RSA0L RSA 1B Block Repeat Start Address [15−0]
REA0L REA 1C Block Repeat End Address [15−0]
PMST PMST 1D Processor Mode Status Register [15−0]
XPC XPC 1E Program Counter Extension Register [7−0]
− − 1F Reserved [15−0]
T0 − 20 Temporary Data Register 0 [15−0]
T1 − 21 Temporary Data Register 1 [15−0]
T2 − 22 Temporary Data Register 2 [15−0]
T3 − 23 Temporary Data Register 3 [15−0]
AC2L − 24 Accumulator 2 [15−0]
AC2H − 25 [31−16]
AC2G − 26 [39−32]
PRODUCT PREVIEW
TMS320C54x and C54x are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Functional Overview
42 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−18. CPU Memory-Mapped Registers (Continued)
C55x
REGISTER BIT FIELDDESCRIPTION
WORD ADDRESS
(HEX)
C54x
REGISTER
CDP − 27 Coefficient Data Pointer [15−0]
AC3L − 28 Accumulator 3 [15−0]
AC3H − 29 [31−16]
AC3G − 2A [39−32]
DPH − 2B Extended Data Page Pointer [6−0]
MDP05 − 2C Reserved [6−0]
MDP67 − 2D Reserved [6−0]
DP − 2E Memory Data Page Start Address [15−0]
PDP − 2F Peripheral Data Page Start Address [8−0]
BK47 − 30 Circular Buffer Size Register for AR[4−7] [15−0]
BKC − 31 Circular Buffer Size Register for CDP [15−0]
BSA01 − 32 Circular Buffer Start Address Register for AR[0−1] [15−0]
BSA23 − 33 Circular Buffer Start Address Register for AR[2−3] [15−0]
BSA45 − 34 Circular Buffer Start Address Register for AR[4−5] [15−0]
BSA67 − 35 Circular Buffer Start Address Register for AR[6−7] [15−0]
BSAC − 36 Circular Buffer Coefficient Start Address Register [15−0]
BIOS − 37 Data Page Pointer Storage Location for 128-word Data Table [15−0]
TRN1 − 38 Transition Register 1 [15−0]
BRC1 − 39 Block Repeat Counter 1 [15−0]
BRS1 − 3A Block Repeat Save 1 [15−0]
CSR − 3B Computed Single Repeat [15−0]
RSA0H − 3C Repeat Start Address 0 [23−16]
RSA0L − 3D [15−0]
REA0H − 3E Repeat End Address 0 [23−16]
REA0L − 3F [15−0]
RSA1H − 40 Repeat Start Address 1 [23−16]
RSA1L − 41 [15−0]
REA1H − 42 Repeat End Address 1 [23−16]
REA1L − 43 [15−0]
RPTC − 44 Repeat Counter [15−0]
IER1 − 45 Interrupt Enable Register 1 [15−0]
IFR1 − 46 Interrupt Flag Register 1 [15−0]
DBIER0 − 47 Debug IER0 [15−0]
DBIER1 − 48 Debug IER1 [15−0]
IVPD − 49 Interrupt Vector Pointer DSP [15−0]
IVPH − 4A Interrupt Vector Pointer HOST [15−0]
ST2_55 − 4B Status Register 2 for C55x [15−0]
SSP − 4C System Stack Pointer [15−0]
SP − 4D User Stack Pointer [15−0]
SPH − 4E Extended Data Page Pointer for the SP and the SSP [6−0]
CDPH − 4F Main Data Page Pointer for the CDP [6−0]
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
43
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.9 Peripheral Register Description
Each 5509A device has a set of memory-mapped registers associated with peripherals as listed in Table 3−19
through Table 3−37. Some registers use less than 16 bits. When reading these registers, unused bits are
always read as 0.
NOTE: The CPU access latency to the peripheral memory-mapped registers is 6 CPU cycles.
Following peripheral register update(s), the CPU must wait at least 6 CPU cycles before
attempting to use that peripheral. When more than one peripheral register is updated in a
sequence, the CPU only needs to wait following the final register write. For example, if the
EMIF is being reconfigured, the CPU must wait until the very last EMIF register update takes
effect before trying to access the external memory. The users should consult the respective
peripheral user’s guide to determine if a peripheral requires additional time to initialize itself
to the new configuration after the register updates take effect.
Table 3−19. Idle Control, Status, and System Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x0001 ICR[7:0] Idle Control Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x0002 ISTR[7:0] Idle Status Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x07FD SYSR[15:0] System Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−20. External Memory Interface Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x0800 EGCR[15:0] EMIF Global Control Register xxxx xxxx 0010 xx00
0x0801 EMI_RST EMIF Global Reset Register xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
0x0802 EMI_BE[13:0] EMIF Bus Error Status Register xx00 0000 0000 0000
0x0803 CE0_1[14:0] EMIF CE0 Space Control Register 1 x010 1111 1111 1111
0x0804 CE0_2[15:0] EMIF CE0 Space Control Register 2 0100 1111 1111 1111
0x0805 CE0_3[7:0] EMIF CE0 Space Control Register 3 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x0806 CE1_1[14:0] EMIF CE1 Space Control Register 1 x010 1111 1111 1111
0x0807 CE1_2[15:0] EMIF CE1 Space Control Register 2 0100 1111 1111 1111
0x0808 CE1_3[7:0] EMIF CE1 Space Control Register 3 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x0809 CE2_1[14:0] EMIF CE2 Space Control Register 1 x010 1111 1111 1111
0x080A CE2_2[15:0] EMIF CE2 Space Control Register 2 0101 1111 1111 1111
0x080B CE2_3[7:0] EMIF CE2 Space Control Register 3 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x080C CE3_1[14:0] EMIF CE3 Space Control Register 1 x010 1111 1111 1111
0x080D CE3_2[15:0] EMIF CE3 Space Control Register 2 0101 1111 1111 1111
0x080E CE3_3[7:0] EMIF CE3 Space Control Register 3 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x080F SDC1[15:0] EMIF SDRAM Control Register 1 1111 1001 0100 1000
0x0810 SDPER[11:0] EMIF SDRAM Period Register xxxx 0000 1000 0000
0x0811 SDCNT[11:0] EMIF SDRAM Counter Register xxxx 0000 1000 0000
0x0812 INIT EMIF SDRAM Init Register xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
0x0813 SDC2[9:0] EMIF SDRAM Control Register 2 xxxx xx11 1111 1111
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
44 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−21. DMA Configuration Registers
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
GLOBAL REGISTER
0x0E00 DMA_GCR[2:0] DMA Global Control Register xxxx xxxx xxxx x000
0x0E02 DMA_GSCR DMA Software Compatibility Register
0x0E03 DMA_GTCR DMA Timeout Control Register
CHANNEL #0 REGISTERS
0x0C00 DMA_CSDP0 DMA Channel 0 Source Destination
Parameters Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C01 DMA_CCR0[15:0] DMA Channel 0 Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C02 DMA_CICR0[5:0] DMA Channel 0 Interrupt Control Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0011
0x0C03 DMA_CSR0[6:0] DMA Channel 0 Status Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0000
0x0C04 DMA_CSSA_L0 DMA Channel 0 Source Start Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C05 DMA_CSSA_U0 DMA Channel 0 Source Start Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C06 DMA_CDSA_L0 DMA Channel 0 Source Destination Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C07 DMA_CDSA_U0 DMA Channel 0 Source Destination Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C08 DMA_CEN0 DMA Channel 0 Element Number Register Undefined
0x0C09 DMA_CFN0 DMA Channel 0 Frame Number Register Undefined
0x0C0A DMA_CFI0/
DMA_CSFI0‡DMA Channel 0 Frame Index Register/
DMA Channel 0 Source Frame Index Register‡Undefined
0x0C0B DMA_CEI0/
DMA_CSEI0§DMA Channel 0 Element Index Register/
DMA Channel 0 Source Element Index Register§Undefined
0x0C0C DMA_CSAC0 DMA Channel 0 Source Address Counter Undefined
0x0C0D DMA_CDAC0 DMA Channel 0 Destination Address Counter Undefined
0x0C0E DMA_CDEI0 DMA Channel 0 Destination Element Index Register Undefined
0x0C0F DMA_CDFI0 DMA Channel 0 Destination Frame Index Register Undefined
†Hardware reset: x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡On the TMS320VC5509, the channel frame index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CFIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSFIn and DMA_CDFIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
§On the TMS320VC5509, the channel element index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CEIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSEIn and DMA_CDEIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
45
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−21. DMA Configuration Registers (Continued)
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) RESET VALUE†
DESCRIPTIONREGISTER NAME
CHANNEL #1 REGISTERS
0x0C20 DMA_CSDP1 DMA Channel 1 Source Destination
Parameters Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C21 DMA_CCR1[15:0] DMA Channel 1 Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C22 DMA_CICR1[5:0] DMA Channel 1 Interrupt Control Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0011
0x0C23 DMA_CSR1[6:0] DMA Channel 1 Status Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0000
0x0C24 DMA_CSSA_L1 DMA Channel 1 Source Start Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C25 DMA_CSSA_U1 DMA Channel 1 Source Start Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C26 DMA_CDSA_L1 DMA Channel 1 Source Destination Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C27 DMA_CDSA_U1 DMA Channel 1 Source Destination Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C28 DMA_CEN1 DMA Channel 1 Element Number Register Undefined
0x0C29 DMA_CFN1 DMA Channel 1 Frame Number Register Undefined
0x0C2A DMA_CFI1/
DMA_CSFI1‡DMA Channel 1 Frame Index Register/
DMA Channel 1 Source Frame Index Register‡Undefined
0x0C2B DMA_CEI1/
DMA_CSEI1§DMA Channel 1 Element Index Register/
DMA Channel 1 Source Element Index Register§Undefined
0x0C2C DMA_CSAC1 DMA Channel 1 Source Address Counter Undefined
0x0C2D DMA_CDAC1 DMA Channel 1 Destination Address Counter Undefined
0x0C2E DMA_CDEI1 DMA Channel 1 Destination Element Index Register Undefined
0x0C2F DMA_CDFI1 DMA Channel 1 Destination Frame Index Register Undefined
†Hardware reset: x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡On the TMS320VC5509, the channel frame index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CFIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSFIn and DMA_CDFIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
§On the TMS320VC5509, the channel element index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CEIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSEIn and DMA_CDEIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
46 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−21. DMA Configuration Registers (Continued)
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) RESET VALUE†
DESCRIPTIONREGISTER NAME
CHANNEL #2 REGISTERS
0x0C40 DMA_CSDP2 DMA Channel 2 Source Destination
Parameters Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C41 DMA_CCR2[15:0] DMA Channel 2 Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C42 DMA_CICR2[5:0] DMA Channel 2 Interrupt Control Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0011
0x0C43 DMA_CSR2[6:0] DMA Channel 2 Status Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0000
0x0C44 DMA_CSSA_L2 DMA Channel 2 Source Start Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C45 DMA_CSSA_U2 DMA Channel 2 Source Start Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C46 DMA_CDSA_L2 DMA Channel 2 Source Destination Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C47 DMA_CDSA_U2 DMA Channel 2 Source Destination Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C48 DMA_CEN2 DMA Channel 2 Element Number Register Undefined
0x0C49 DMA_CFN2 DMA Channel 2 Frame Number Register Undefined
0x0C4A DMA_CFI2/
DMA_CSFI2‡DMA Channel 2 Frame Index Register/
DMA Channel 2 Source Frame Index Register‡Undefined
0x0C4B DMA_CEI2/
DMA_CSEI2§DMA Channel 2 Element Index Register/
DMA Channel 2 Source Element Index Register§Undefined
0x0C4C DMA_CSAC2 DMA Channel 2 Source Address Counter Undefined
0x0C4D DMA_CDAC2 DMA Channel 2 Destination Address Counter Undefined
0x0C4E DMA_CDEI2 DMA Channel 2 Destination Element Index Register Undefined
0x0C4F DMA_CDFI2 DMA Channel 2 Destination Frame Index Register Undefined
†Hardware reset: x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡On the TMS320VC5509, the channel frame index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CFIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSFIn and DMA_CDFIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
§On the TMS320VC5509, the channel element index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CEIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSEIn and DMA_CDEIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
47
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−21. DMA Configuration Registers (Continued)
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) RESET VALUE†
DESCRIPTIONREGISTER NAME
CHANNEL #3 REGISTERS
0x0C60 DMA_CSDP3 DMA Channel 3 Source Destination
Parameters Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C61 DMA_CCR3[15:0] DMA Channel 3 Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C62 DMA_CICR3[5:0] DMA Channel 3 Interrupt Control Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0011
0x0C63 DMA_CSR3[6:0] DMA Channel 3 Status Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0000
0x0C64 DMA_CSSA_L3 DMA Channel 3 Source Start Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C65 DMA_CSSA_U3 DMA Channel 3 Source Start Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C66 DMA_CDSA_L3 DMA Channel 3 Source Destination Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C67 DMA_CDSA_U3 DMA Channel 3 Source Destination Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C68 DMA_CEN3 DMA Channel 3 Element Number Register Undefined
0x0C69 DMA_CFN3 DMA Channel 3 Frame Number Register Undefined
0x0C6A DMA_CFI3/
DMA_CSFI3‡DMA Channel 3 Frame Index Register/
DMA Channel 3 Source Frame Index Register‡Undefined
0x0C6B DMA_CEI3/
DMA_CSEI3§DMA Channel 3 Element Index Register/
DMA Channel 3 Source Element Index Register§Undefined
0x0C6C DMA_CSAC3 DMA Channel 3 Source Address Counter Undefined
0x0C6D DMA_CDAC3 DMA Channel 3 Destination Address Counter Undefined
0x0C6E DMA_CDEI3 DMA Channel 3 Destination Element Index Register Undefined
0x0C6F DMA_CDFI3 DMA Channel 3 Destination Frame Index Register Undefined
†Hardware reset: x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡On the TMS320VC5509, the channel frame index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CFIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSFIn and DMA_CDFIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
§On the TMS320VC5509, the channel element index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CEIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSEIn and DMA_CDEIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
48 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−21. DMA Configuration Registers (Continued)
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) RESET VALUE†
DESCRIPTIONREGISTER NAME
CHANNEL #4 REGISTERS
0x0C80 DMA_CSDP4 DMA Channel 4 Source Destination
Parameters Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C81 DMA_CCR4[15:0] DMA Channel 4 Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0C82 DMA_CICR4[5:0] DMA Channel 4 Interrupt Control Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0011
0x0C83 DMA_CSR4[6:0] DMA Channel 4 Status Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0000
0x0C84 DMA_CSSA_L4 DMA Channel 4 Source Start Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C85 DMA_CSSA_U4 DMA Channel 4 Source Start Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C86 DMA_CDSA_L4 DMA Channel 4 Source Destination Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0C87 DMA_CDSA_U4 DMA Channel 4 Source Destination Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0C88 DMA_CEN4 DMA Channel 4 Element Number Register Undefined
0x0C89 DMA_CFN4 DMA Channel 4 Frame Number Register Undefined
0x0C8A DMA_CFI4/
DMA_CSFI4‡DMA Channel 4 Frame Index Register/
DMA Channel 4 Source Frame Index Register‡Undefined
0x0C8B DMA_CEI4/
DMA_CSEI4§DMA Channel 4 Element Index Register/
DMA Channel 4 Source Element Index Register§Undefined
0x0C8C DMA_CSAC4 DMA Channel 4 Source Address Counter Undefined
0x0C8D DMA_CDAC4 DMA Channel 4 Destination Address Counter Undefined
0x0C8E DMA_CDEI4 DMA Channel 4 Destination Element Index Register Undefined
0x0C8F DMA_CDFI4 DMA Channel 4 Destination Frame Index Register Undefined
†Hardware reset: x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡On the TMS320VC5509, the channel frame index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CFIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSFIn and DMA_CDFIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
§On the TMS320VC5509, the channel element index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CEIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSEIn and DMA_CDEIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
49
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−21. DMA Configuration Registers (Continued)
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) RESET VALUE†
DESCRIPTIONREGISTER NAME
CHANNEL #5 REGISTERS
0x0CA0 DMA_CSDP5 DMA Channel 5 Source Destination
Parameters Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0CA1 DMA_CCR5[15:0] DMA Channel 5 Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x0CA2 DMA_CICR5[5:0] DMA Channel 5 Interrupt Control Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0011
0x0CA3 DMA_CSR5[6:0] DMA Channel 5 Status Register xxxx xxxx xx00 0000
0x0CA4 DMA_CSSA_L5 DMA Channel 5 Source Start Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0CA5 DMA_CSSA_U5 DMA Channel 5 Source Start Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0CA6 DMA_CDSA_L5 DMA Channel 5 Source Destination Address Register
(lower bits) Undefined
0x0CA7 DMA_CDSA_U5 DMA Channel 5 Source Destination Address Register
(upper bits) Undefined
0x0CA8 DMA_CEN5 DMA Channel 5 Element Number Register Undefined
0x0CA9 DMA_CFN5 DMA Channel 5 Frame Number Register Undefined
0x0CAA DMA_CFI5/
DMA_CSFI5‡DMA Channel 5 Frame Index Register/
DMA Channel 5 Source Frame Index Register‡Undefined
0x0CAB DMA_CEI5/
DMA_CSEI5§DMA Channel 5 Element Index Register/
DMA Channel 5 Source Element Index Register§Undefined
0x0CAC DMA_CSAC5 DMA Channel 5 Source Address Counter Undefined
0x0CAD DMA_CDAC5 DMA Channel 5 Destination Address Counter Undefined
0x0CAE DMA_CDEI5 DMA Channel 5 Destination Element Index Register Undefined
0x0CAF DMA_CDFI5 DMA Channel 5 Destination Frame Index Register Undefined
†Hardware reset: x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡On the TMS320VC5509, the channel frame index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CFIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSFIn and DMA_CDFIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
§On the TMS320VC5509, the channel element index applies to both source and destination and this register behaves as DMA_CEIn. On the
TMS320VC5509A, DMA_CSEIn and DMA_CDEIn provide separate source and destination frame indexing. The 5509A can be programmed
for software compatibility with the 5509 through the Software Compatibility Register (DMA_GSCR).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
50 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−22. Real-Time Clock Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x1800 RTCSEC Seconds Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1801 RTCSECA Seconds Alarm Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1802 RTCMIN Minutes Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1803 RTCMINA Minutes Alarm Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1804 RTCHOUR Hours Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1805 RTCHOURA Hours Alarm Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1806 RTCDAYW Day of the Week Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1807 RTCDAYM Day of the Month (date) Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1808 RTCMONTH Month Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x1809 RTCYEAR Year Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x180A RTCPINTR Periodic Interrupt Selection Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x180B RTCINTEN Interrupt Enable Register 0000 0000 1000 0000
0x180C RTCINTFL Interrupt Flag Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x180D−0x1BFF Reserved
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−23. Clock Generator
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x1C00 CLKMD[14:0] Clock Mode Register 0010 0000 0000 0010 DIV1 mode
0x1E00
USBPLL[14:0]
USB PLL Clock Generator
If non-USB boot mode:
0010 0000 0000 0110 DIV2 mode
0x1E00
USBPLL[14:0]
USB PLL Clock Generator
If USB boot mode:
0010 0010 0001 0011 PLL MULT4 mode
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−24. Timers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x1000 TIM0[15:0] Timer Count Register, Timer #0 1111 1111 1111 1111
0x1001 PRD0[15:0] Period Register, Timer #0 1111 1111 1111 1111
0x1002 TCR0[15:0] Timer Control Register, Timer #0 0000 0000 0001 0000
0x1003 PRSC0[15:0] T imer Prescaler Register, Timer #0 xxxx 0000 xxxx 0000
0x2400 TIM1[15:0] Timer Count Register, Timer #1 1111 1111 1111 1111
0x2401 PRD1[15:0] Period Register, Timer #1 1111 1111 1111 1111
0x2402 TCR1[15:0] Timer Control Register, Timer #1 0000 0000 0001 0000
0x2403 PRSC1[15:0] T imer Prescaler Register, Timer #1 xxxx 0000 xxxx 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
51
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−25. Multichannel Serial Port #0
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x2800 DRR2_0[15:0] Data Receive Register 2, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2801 DRR1_0[15:0] Data Receive Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2802 DXR2_0[15:0] Data Transmit Register 2, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2803 DXR1_0[15:0] Data Transmit Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2804 SPCR2_0[15:0] Serial Port Control Register 2, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2805 SPCR1_0[15:0] Serial Port Control Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2806 RCR2_0[15:0] Receive Control Register 2, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2807 RCR1_0[15:0] Receive Control Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2808 XCR2_0[15:0] Transmit Control Register 2, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2809 XCR1_0[15:0] Transmit Control Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x280A SRGR2_0[15:0] Sample Rate Generator Register 2, McBSP #0 0020 0000 0000 0000
0x280B SRGR1_0[15:0] Sample Rate Generator Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0001
0x280C MCR2_0[15:0] Multichannel Control Register 2, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x280D MCR1_0[15:0] Multichannel Control Register 1, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x280E RCERA_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition A, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x280F RCERB_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition B, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2810 XCERA_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition A, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2811 XCERB_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition B, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2812 PCR0[15:0] Pin Control Register, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2813 RCERC_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition C, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2814 RCERD_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition D, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2815 XCERC_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition C, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2816 XCERD_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition D, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2817 RCERE_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition E, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2818 RCERF_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition F, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2819 XCERE_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition E, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x281A XCERF_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition F, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x281B RCERG_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition G, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x281C RCERH_0[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition H, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x281D XCERG_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition G, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x281E XCERH_0[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition H, McBSP #0 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
52 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−26. Multichannel Serial Port #1
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x2C00 DRR2_1[15:0] Data Receive Register 2, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C01 DRR1_1[15:0] Data Receive Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C02 DXR2_1[15:0] Data Transmit Register 2, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C03 DXR1_1[15:0] Data Transmit Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C04 SPCR2_1[15:0] Serial Port Control Register 2, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C05 SPCR1_1[15:0] Serial Port Control Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C06 RCR2_1[15:0] Receive Control Register 2, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C07 RCR1_1[15:0] Receive Control Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C08 XCR2_1[15:0] Transmit Control Register 2, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C09 XCR1_1[15:0] Transmit Control Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C0A SRGR2_1[15:0] Sample Rate Generator Register 2, McBSP #1 0020 0000 0000 0000
0x2C0B SRGR1_1[15:0] Sample Rate Generator Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0001
0x2C0C MCR2_1[15:0] Multichannel Control Register 2, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C0D MCR1_1[15:0] Multichannel Control Register 1, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C0E RCERA_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition A, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C0F RCERB_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition B, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C10 XCERA_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition A, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C11 XCERB_1[15:0] T ransmit Channel Enable Register Partition B, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C12 PCR1[15:0] Pin Control Register, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C13 RCERC_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition C, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C14 RCERD_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition D, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C15 XCERC_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition C, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C16 XCERD_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition D, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C17 RCERE_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition E, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C18 RCERF_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition F, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C19 XCERE_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition E, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C1A XCERF_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition F, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C1B RCERG_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition G, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C1C RCERH_1[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition H, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C1D XCERG_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition G, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x2C1E XCERH_1[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition H, McBSP #1 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
53
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−27. Multichannel Serial Port #2
PORT ADDRESS
(WORD) REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x3000 DRR2_2[15:0] Data Receive Register 2, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3001 DRR1_2[15:0] Data Receive Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3002 DXR2_2[15:0] Data Transmit Register 2, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3003 DXR1_2[15:0] Data Transmit Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3004 SPCR2_2[15:0] Serial Port Control Register 2, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3005 SPCR1_2[15:0] Serial Port Control Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3006 RCR2_2[15:0] Receive Control Register 2, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3007 RCR1_2[15:0] Receive Control Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3008 XCR2_2[15:0] Transmit Control Register 2, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3009 XCR1_2[15:0] Transmit Control Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x300A SRGR2_2[15:0] Sample Rate Generator Register 2, McBSP #2 0020 0000 0000 0000
0x300B SRGR1_2[15:0] Sample Rate Generator Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0001
0x300C MCR2_2[15:0] Multichannel Control Register 2, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x300D MCR1_2[15:0] Multichannel Control Register 1, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x300E RCERA_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition A, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x300F RCERB_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition B, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3010 XCERA_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition A, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3011 XCERB_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition B, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3012 PCR2[15:0] Pin Control Register, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3013 RCERC_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition C, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3014 RCERD_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition D, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3015 XCERC_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition C, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3016 XCERD_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition D, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3017 RCERE_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition E, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3018 RCERF_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition F, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3019 XCERE_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition E, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x301A XCERF_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition F, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x301B RCERG_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition G, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x301C RCERH_2[15:0] Receive Channel Enable Register Partition H, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x301D XCERG_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition G, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x301E XCERH_2[15:0] Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition H, McBSP #2 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
54 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−28. GPIO
WORD
ADDRESS REGISTER
NAME PIN DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x3400 IODIR[7:0] GPIO[7:0] General-purpose I/O Direction Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3401 IODATA[7:0] GPIO[7:0] General-purpose I/O Data Register 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx
0x4400 AGPIOEN[15:0] A[15:0] Address/GPIO Enable Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4401 AGPIODIR[15:0] A[15:0] Address/GPIO Direction Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4402 AGPIODATA[15:0] A[15:0] Address/GPIO Data Register xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
0x4403 EHPIGPIOEN[5:0] GPIO[13:8] EHPI/GPIO Enable Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4404 EHPIGPIODIR[5:0] GPIO[13:8] EHPI/GPIO Direction Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4405 EHPIGPIODATA[5:0] GPIO[13:8] EHPI/GPIO Data Register 0000 0000 00xx xxxx
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−29. Device Revision ID
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION VALUE‡
0x3803 Rev ID[4:1] Silicon Revision Identification Rev. 1.0: xxxx xxxx xxx0 000x
Rev. 1.1: xxxx xxxx xxx0 001x
‡x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−30. I2C Module Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x3C00 I2COAR[9:0]§I2C Own Address Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C01 I2CIMR I2C Interrupt Mask Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C02 I2CSTR I2C Status Register 0000 0001 0000 0000
0x3C03 I2CCLKL[15:0] I2C Clock Divider Low Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C04 I2CCLKH[15:0] I2C Clock Divider High Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C05 I2CCNT[15:0] I2C Data Count 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C06 I2CDRR[7:0] I2C Data Receive Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C07 I2CSAR[9:0] I2C Slave Address Register 0000 0011 1111 1111
0x3C08 I2CDXR[7:0] I2C Data Transmit Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C09 I2CMDR[14:0] I2C Mode Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C0A I2CIVR I2C Interrupt Vector Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C0B I2CGPIO I2C General-Purpose Register xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx
0x3C0C I2CPSC I2C Prescaler Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x3C0D − Reserved
0x3C0E − Reserved
0x3C0F − Reserved
− I2CRSR I2C receive shift register (not accessible to the CPU)
− I2CXSR I2C transmit shift register (not accessible to the CPU)
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
§Specifies a unique 5509A I2C address. This register must be set by the programmer . When this device is used in conjunction with another I2C
master device, the register must be programmed to the I2C slave address (01011xx) allocated by Philips Semiconductor for the 5509A. The
two LSBs are programmable address bits.
NOTE: I2C protocol compatible, no fail-safe buffer.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
55
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−31. Watchdog Timer Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x4000 WDTIM[15:0] WD Timer Counter Register 1111 1111 1111 1111
0x4001 WDPRD[15:0] WD Timer Period Register 1111 1111 1111 1111
0x4002 WDTCR[13:0] WD Timer Control Register 0000 0011 1100 1111
0x4003 WDTCR2[15:0] WD Timer Control Register 2 0001 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−32. MMC/SD1 Module Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x4800 MMCFCLK[8:0] MMC Function Clock Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0111
0x4801 MMCCTL[10:0] MMC Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4802 MMCCLK[8:0] MMC Clock Control Register 0000 0000 0000 1111
0x4803 MMCST0[12:0] MMC Status Register 0 0000 0001 0000 0000
0x4804 MMCST1[5:0] MMC Status Register 1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4805 MMCIE[12:0] MMC Interrupt Enable Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4806 MMCTOR[7:0] MMC Response Time-Out Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4807 MMCTOD[15:0] MMC Data Read Time-Out Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4808 MMCBLEN[11:0] MMC Block Length Register 0000 0010 0000 0000
0x4809 MMCNBLK[15:0] MMC Number of Blocks Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x480A MMCNBLC[15:0] MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x480B MMCDRR[15:0] MMC Data Receive Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x480C MMCDXR[15:0] MMC Data Transmit Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x480D MMCCMD[15:0] MMC Command Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x480E MMCARGL[15:0] MMC Argument Register − Low 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x480F MMCARGH[15:0] MMC Argument Register − High 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4810 MMCRSP0[15:0] MMC Response Register 0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4811 MMCRSP1[15:0] MMC Response Register 1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4812 MMCRSP2[15:0] MMC Response Register 2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4813 MMCRSP3[15:0] MMC Response Register 3 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4814 MMCRSP4[15:0] MMC Response Register 4 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4815 MMCRSP5[15:0] MMC Response Register 5 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4816 MMCRSP6[15:0] MMC Response Register 6 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4817 MMCRSP7[15:0] MMC Response Register 7 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4818 MMCDRSP[7:0] MMC Data Response Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4819 Reserved
0x481A MMCCIDX[7:0] MMC Command Index Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
56 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−33. MMC/SD2 Module Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x4C00 MMCFCLK[8:0] MMC Function Clock Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0111
0x4C01 MMCCTL[10:0] MMC Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C02 MMCCLK[8:0] MMC Clock Control Register 0000 0000 0000 1111
0x4C03 MMCST0[12:0] MMC Status Register 0 0000 0001 0000 0000
0x4C04 MMCST1[5:0] MMC Status Register 1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C05 MMCIE[12:0] MMC Interrupt Enable Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C06 MMCTOR[7:0] MMC Response Time-Out Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C07 MMCTOD[15:0] MMC Data Read Time-Out Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C08 MMCBLEN[11:0] MMC Block Length Register 0000 0010 0000 0000
0x4C09 MMCNBLK[15:0] MMC Number of Blocks Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C0A MMCNBLC[15:0] MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C0B MMCDRR[15:0] MMC Data Receive Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C0C MMCDXR[15:0] MMC Data Transmit Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C0D MMCCMD[15:0] MMC Command Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C0E MMCARGL[15:0] MMC Argument Register − Low 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C0F MMCARGH[15:0] MMC Argument Register − High 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C10 MMCRSP0[15:0] MMC Response Register 0 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C11 MMCRSP1[15:0] MMC Response Register 1 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C12 MMCRSP2[15:0] MMC Response Register 2 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C13 MMCRSP3[15:0] MMC Response Register 3 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C14 MMCRSP4[15:0] MMC Response Register 4 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C15 MMCRSP5[15:0] MMC Response Register 5 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C16 MMCRSP6[15:0] MMC Response Register 6 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C17 MMCRSP7[15:0] MMC Response Register 7 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C18 MMCDRSP[7:0] MMC Data Response Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
0x4C19 Reserved
0x4C1A MMCCIDX[7:0] MMC Command Index Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
57
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−34. USB Module Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
DMA CONTEXTS
0x5800 Reserved
0x5808 DMAC_O1 Output Endpoint 1 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5810 DMAC_O2 Output Endpoint 2 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5818 DMAC_O3 Output Endpoint 3 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5820 DMAC_O4 Output Endpoint 4 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5828 DMAC_O5 Output Endpoint 5 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5830 DMAC_O6 Output Endpoint 6 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5838 DMAC_O7 Output Endpoint 7 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5840 Reserved
0x5848 DMAC_I1 Input Endpoint 1 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5850 DMAC_I2 Input Endpoint 2 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5858 DMAC_I3 Input Endpoint 3 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5860 DMAC_I4 Input Endpoint 4 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5868 DMAC_I5 Input Endpoint 5 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5870 DMAC_I6 Input Endpoint 6 DMA Context Register Undefined
0x5878 DMAC_I7 Input Endpoint 7 DMA Context Register Undefined
DATA BUFFER
0x5880 Data Buffers Contains X/Y data buffers for endpoints 1 – 7 Undefined
0x6680 OEB_0 Output Endpoint 0 Buffer Undefined
0x66C0 IEB_0 Input Endpoint 0 Buffer Undefined
0x6700 SUP_0 Setup Packet for Endpoint 0 Undefined
ENDPOINT DESCRIPTOR BLOCKS
0x6708 OEDB_1 Output Endpoint 1 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6710 OEDB_2 Output Endpoint 2 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6718 OEDB_3 Output Endpoint 3 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6720 OEDB_4 Output Endpoint 4 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6728 OEDB_5 Output Endpoint 5 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6730 OEDB_6 Output Endpoint 6 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6738 OEDB_7 Output Endpoint 7 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6740 Reserved
0x6748 IEDB_1 Input Endpoint 1 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6750 IEDB_2 Input Endpoint 2 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6758 IEDB_3 Input Endpoint 3 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6760 IEDB_4 Input Endpoint 4 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6768 IEDB_5 Input Endpoint 5 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6770 IEDB_6 Input Endpoint 6 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
0x6778 IEDB_7 Input Endpoint 7 Descriptor Register Block Undefined
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
58 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 3−34. USB Module Registers (Continued)
WORD ADDRESS RESET VALUE†
DESCRIPTIONREGISTER NAME
CONTROL AND STATUS REGISTERS
0x6780 IEPCNF_0 Input Endpoint 0 Configuration xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6781 IEPBCNT_0 Input Endpoint 0 Byte Count xxxx xxxx 1000 0000
0x6782 OEPCNF_0 Output Endpoint 0 Configuration xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6783 OEPBCNT_0 Output Endpoint 0 Byte Count xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6784 − 0x6790 Reserved
0x6791 GLOBCTL Global Control Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6792 VECINT Vector Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6793 IEPINT Input Endpoint Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6794 OEPINT Output Endpoint Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6795 IDMARINT Input DMA Reload Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6796 ODMARINT Output DMA Reload Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6797 IDMAGINT Input DMA Go Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6798 ODMAGINT Output DMA Go Interrupt Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x6799 IDMAMSK Input DMA Interrupt Mask Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x679A ODMAMSK Output DMA Interrupt Mask Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x679B IEDBMSK Input EDB Interrupt Mask Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x679C OEDBMSK Output EDB Interrupt Mask Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x67A0 HOSTCTL Host DMA Control Register xxxx xxxx xxxx x000
0x67A1 HOSTEP Host DMA Endpoint Register xxxx xxxx x000 0000
0x67A2 HOST Host DMA Status xxxx xxxx xxxx x001
0x67F8 FNUML Frame Number Low Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x67F9 FNUMH Frame Number High xxxx xxxx xxxx x000
0x67FA PSOFTMR PreSOF Interrupt Timer Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x67FC USBCTL USB Control Register xxxx xxxx 0101 0000
0x67FD USBMSK USB Interrupt Mask Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x67FE USBSTA USB Status Register xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
0x67FF FUNADR Function Address Register xxxx xxxx x000 0000
0x7000 USBIDLECTL USB Idle Control and Status Register xxxx xxxx xxxx x000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
59
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 3−35. Analog-to-Digital Controller (ADC) Registers
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x6800 ADCCTL[15:11] ADC Control Register 0111 0000 0000 0000
0x6801 ADCDATA[15:0] ADC Data Register 0111 0000 0000 0000
0x6802 ADCCLKDIV[15:0] ADC Function Clock Divider Register 0000 0000 0000 1111
0x6803 ADCCLKCTL[8:0] ADC Clock Control Register 0000 0000 0000 0111
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
Table 3−36. External Bus Selection Register
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x6C00 EBSR[15:0] External Bus Selection Register 0000 0000 0000 0011‡
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
‡The reset value is 0000 0000 0000 0001 if GPIO0 = 1; the value is 0000 0000 0000 0011 if GPIO0 = 0.
Table 3−37. Secure ROM Register
WORD ADDRESS REGISTER NAME DESCRIPTION RESET VALUE†
0x7400 SROM[0] Secure ROM Register 0000 0000 0000 0000
†Hardware reset; x denotes a “don’t care.”
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
60 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
3.10 Interrupts
Vector-relative locations and priorities for all internal and external interrupts are shown in Table 3−38.
Table 3−38. Interrupt Table
NAME SOFTWARE
(TRAP)
EQUIVALENT
RELATIVE
LOCATION†
(HEX BYTES) PRIORITY FUNCTION
RESET SINT0 0 0 Reset (hardware and software)
NMI‡SINT1 8 1 Nonmaskable interrupt
BERR SINT24 C0 2 Bus Error interrupt
INT0 SINT2 10 3 External interrupt #0
INT1 SINT16 80 4 External interrupt #1
INT2 SINT3 18 5 External interrupt #2
TINT0 SINT4 20 6 Timer #0 interrupt
RINT0 SINT5 28 7 McBSP #0 receive interrupt
XINT0 SINT17 88 8 McBSP #0 transmit interrupt
RINT1 SINT6 30 9 McBSP #1 receive interrupt
XINT1/MMCSD1 SINT7 38 10 McBSP #1 transmit interrupt, MMC/SD #1 interrupt
USB SINT8 40 11 USB interrupt
DMAC0 SINT18 90 12 DMA Channel #0 interrupt
DMAC1 SINT9 48 13 DMA Channel #1 interrupt
DSPINT SINT10 50 14 Interrupt from host
INT3/WDTINT SINT11 58 15 External interrupt #3 or Watchdog timer interrupt
INT4/RTC§SINT19 98 16 External interrupt #4 or RTC interrupt
RINT2 SINT12 60 17 McBSP #2 receive interrupt
XINT2/MMCSD2 SINT13 68 18 McBSP #2 transmit interrupt , MMC/SD #2 interrupt
DMAC2 SINT20 A0 19 DMA Channel #2 interrupt
DMAC3 SINT21 A8 20 DMA Channel #3 interrupt
DMAC4 SINT14 70 21 DMA Channel #4 interrupt
DMAC5 SINT15 78 22 DMA Channel #5 interrupt
TINT1 SINT22 B0 23 Timer #1 interrupt
IIC SINT23 B8 24 I2C interrupt
DLOG SINT25 C8 25 Data Log interrupt
RTOS SINT26 D0 26 Real-time Operating System interrupt
− SINT27 D8 27 Software interrupt #27
− SINT28 E0 28 Software interrupt #28
− SINT29 E8 29 Software interrupt #29
− SINT30 F0 30 Software interrupt #30
− SINT31 F8 31 Software interrupt #31
†Absolute addresses of the interrupt vector locations are determined by the contents of the IVPD and IVPH registers. Interrupt vectors for
interrupts 0−15 and 24−31 are relative to IVPD. Interrupt vectors for interrupts 16−23 are relative to IVPH.
‡The NMI pin is internally tied high. However, NMI interrupt vector can be used for SINT1 and Watchdog Timer Interrupt.
§It is recommended that either the INT4 or RTC interrupt be used. If both INT4 and RTC interrupts are used, one interrupt event can potentially
hold off the other interrupt. For example, if INT4 is asserted first and held low , the RTC interrupt will not be recognized until the INT4 pin is back
to high-logic state again. The INT4 pin must be pulled high if only the RTC interrupt is used.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
61
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.10.1 IFR and IER Registers
The IFR0 (Interrupt Flag Register 0) and IER0 (Interrupt Enable Register 0) bit layouts are shown in
Figure 3−18.
NOTE: Some of the interrupts are shared between multiple interrupt sources. All sources for
a particular bit are internally combined using a logic OR function so that no additional user
configuration is required to select the interrupt source. In the case of the serial port, the shared
functions are mutually exclusive so that only one of the interrupt sources will be active at a time
in a given system. For example: It is not possible to use McBSP2 and MMC/SD2
simultaneously. However, in the case of INT3/WDTINT it is possible to have active interrupts
simultaneously from both the external INT3 source and the watchdog timer. When an interrupt
is detected in this bit, the watchdog timer status register should be polled to determine if the
watchdog timer is the interrupt source.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DMAC5 DMAC4 XINT2/
MMCSD2 RINT2 INT3/
WDTINT DSPINT DMAC1 USB
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
76543210
XINT1/
MMCSD1 RINT1 RINT0 TINT0 INT2 INT0 Reserved
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−18. IFR0 and IER0 Bit Locations
Table 3−39. IFR0 and IER0 Register Bit Fields
BIT
FUNCTION
NUMBER NAME
FUNCTION
15 DMAC5 DMA channel 5 interrupt flag/mask bit
14 DMAC4 DMA channel 4 interrupt flag/mask bit
13 XINT2/MMCSD2 This bit is used as either the McBSP2 transmit interrupt flag/mask bit, the MMC/SD2 interrupt
flag/mask bit.
12 RINT2 McBSP2 receive interrupt flag/mask bit.
11 INT3/WDTINT This bit is used as either the external user interrupt 3 flag/mask bit, or the watchdog timer interrupt
flag/mask bit.
10 DSPINT HPI host-to-DSP interrupt flag/mask.
9 DMAC1 DMA channel 1 interrupt flag/mask bit
8 USB USB interrupt flag/mask bit.
7 XINT1/MMCSD1 This bit is used as either the McBSP1 transmit interrupt flag/mask bit, the MMC/SD1 interrupt
flag/mask bit.
6 RINT1 McBSP1 receive interrupt flag/mask bit.
5 RINT0 McBSP0 receive interrupt flag bit
4 TINT0 Timer 0 interrupt flag bit
3 INT2 External interrupt 2 flag bit
2 INT0 External interrupt 0 flag bit
1−0 − Reserved for future expansion. These bits should always be written with 0.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
62 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
The IFR1 (Interrupt Flag Register 1) and IER1 (Interrupt Enable Register 1) bit layouts are shown in
Figure 3−19.
NOTE: It is possible to have active interrupts simultaneously from both the external interrupt 4
(INT4) and the real-time clock (RTC). When an interrupt is detected in this bit, the real-time
clock status register should be polled to determine if the real-time clock is the source of the
interrupt.
15 8
Reserved
76543210
I2C TINT1 DMAC3 DMAC2 INT4/RTC DMAC0 XINT0 INT1
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value after reset
Figure 3−19. IFR1 and IER1 Bit Locations
Table 3−40. IFR1 and IER1 Register Bit Fields
BIT
FUNCTION
NUMBER NAME
FUNCTION
15−8 − Reserved for future expansion. These bits should always be written with 0.
7 I2C I2C interrupt flag/mask bit
6 TINT1 Timer 1 interrupt flag/mask bit
5 DMAC3 DMA channel 3 interrupt flag/mask bit
4 DMAC2 DMA channel 2 interrupt flag/mask bit
3 INT4/RTC This bit can be used as either the external user interrupt 4 flag/mask bit, or the real-time clock
interrupt flag/mask bit.
2 DMAC0 DMA channel 0 interrupt flag/mask bit
1 XINT0 McBSP transmit 0 interrupt flag/mask bit
0 INT1 External user interrupt 1 flag/mask bit
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Functional Overview
63
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
3.10.2 Interrupt Timing
The external interrupts (NMI and INT) are synchronized to the CPU by way of a two-flip-flop synchronizer. The
interrupt inputs are sampled on falling edges of the CPU clock. A sequence of 1-1-0-0-0 on consecutive cycles
on the interrupt pin is required for an interrupt to be detected. Therefore, the minimum low pulse duration on
the external interrupts on the 5509A is three CPU clock periods.
3.10.3 Waking Up From IDLE Condition
One of the following four events can wake up the CPU from IDLE:
•Hardware Reset
•External Interrupt
•RTC Interrupt
•USB Event (Reset or Resume)
3.10.3.1 Waking Up From IDLE With Oscillator Disabled
With an external interrupt, a R TC interrupt, or an USB resume/reset, the clock generation circuit wakes up the
oscillator and enables the USB PLL to determine the oscillator stable time. In the case of the interrupt being
disabled by clearing the associated bit in the Interrupt Enable Register (IERx), the CPU is not “woken up”. If
the interrupt due to the wake-up event is enabled, the interrupt is sent to the CPU only after the oscillator is
stabilized and the USB PLL is locked. If the external interrupt serves as the wake-up event, the interrupt line
must stay low for a minimum of 3 CPU cycles after the oscillator is stabilized to wake up the CPU. Otherwise,
only the clock domain will wake up and another external interrupt will be needed to wake up the CPU.
Once out of IDLE, any system not using the USB should put the USB module in idle mode to reduce power
consumption.
For more details on the TMS320VC5509A oscillator-disable process, see the Disabling the Internal Oscillator
With External Crystal on the TMS320VC5509 DSP application report (literature number SPRA078).
3.10.4 Idling Clock Domain When External Parallel Bus Operating in EHPI Mode
The clock domain cannot be idled when the External Parallel Bus is operating in EHPI mode to ensure host
access to the DSP memory. To work around this restriction, use the HIDL bit of the External Bus Selection
Register (EBSR) with the CLKGENI bit of the Idle Control Register (ICR) to idle the clock domain.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Documentation Support
64 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
4 Documentation Support
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320 DSP family of devices from product announcement through
applications development. The following types of documentation are available to support the design and use
of the TMS320C5000 platform of DSPs:
•TMS320C55x DSP Functional Overview (literature number SPRU312)
•Device-specific data sheets
•Complete user’s guides
•Development support tools
•Hardware and software application reports
TMS320C55x reference documentation includes, but is not limited to, the following:
•TMS320C55x DSP CPU Reference Guide (literature number SPRU371)
•TMS320C55x DSP Mnemonic Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU374)
•TMS320C55x DSP Algebraic Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU375)
•TMS320C55x DSP Programmer’s Guide (literature number SPRU376)
•TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU317)
•TMS320C55x Optimizing C/C++ Compiler User’s Guide (literature number SPRU281)
•TMS320C55x Assembly Language Tools User’s Guide (literature number SPRU280)
•TMS320C55x DSP Library Programmer’s Reference (literature number SPRU422)
The reference guides describe in detail the TMS320C55x DSP products currently available and the
hardware and software applications, including algorithms, for fixed-point TMS320 DSP family of devices.
A series of DSP textbooks is published by Prentice-Hall and John Wiley & Sons to support digital signal
processing research and education. The TMS320 DSP newsletter, Details on Signal Processing, is
published quarterly and distributed to update TMS320 DSP customers on product information.
Information regarding TI DSP products is also available on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform
resource locator (URL).
PRODUCT PREVIEW
TMS320 and TMS320C5000 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Documentation Support
65
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
4.1 Device and Development Tool Support Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
TMS320 DSP devices and support tools. Each TMS320 DSP commercial family member has one of three
prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS. Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for
support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from
engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’ s electrical specifications
TMP Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed quality
and reliability verification
TMS Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification
testing.
TMDS Fully qualified development-support product
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped with appropriate disclaimers
describing their limitations and intended uses. Experimental devices (TMX) may not be representative of a
final product and Texas Instruments reserves the right to change or discontinue these products without notice.
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system
because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
TMS320 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
Documentation Support
66 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
4.2 TMS320VC5509A Device Nomenclature
PREFIX
TMS 320 VC 5509A GHH
TMX = Experimental device
TMP = Prototype device
TMS = Qualified device
SMJ = MIL-STD-883C
SM = High Rel (non-883C)
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320 family
TECHNOLOGY
PACKAGE TYPE‡
GHH = 179-pin plastic BGA
PGE = 144-pin plastic LQFP
VC = Dual-Supply CMOS
DEVICE
55x DSP: 5509A
†No silicon revision marked on the package indicates earlier (TMX or TMP) silicon. See the TMS320VC5509A Digital Signal Processor
Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ200) to identify TMX or TMP silicon revision.
‡BGA = Ball Grid Array
LQFP = Low-Profile Quad Flatpack
(10)
DEVICE SILICON REVISION†
10 = Revision 1.0
Figure 4−1. Device Nomenclature for the TMS320VC5509A
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
67
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5 Electrical Specifications
This section provides the absolute maximum ratings and the recommended operating conditions for the
TMS320VC5509A DSP.
All electrical and switching characteristics in this data manual are valid over the recommended operating
conditions unless otherwise specified.
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The list of absolute maximum ratings are specified over operating case temperature. Stresses beyond those
listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress
ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated
under Section 5.2 is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may
affect device reliability. All voltage values are with respect to VSS. Figure 5−1 provides the test load circuit
values for a 3.3-V I/O.
Supply voltage I/O range, DVDD − 0.3 V to 4.0 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supply voltage core range, CVDD − 0.3 V to 2.0 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input voltage range, VI − 0.3 V to 4.5 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output voltage range, VO − 0.3 V to 4.5 V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating case temperature range, TC − 40°C to 85°C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage temperature range Tstg − 55°C to 150°C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
MIN NOM MAX UNIT
Core
CVDD Device supply voltage 1.55 1.6 1.65 V
Peripherals
RCVDD RTC module supply voltage, core 1.55 1.6 1.65 V
RDVDD RTC module supply voltage, I/O (RTCINX1 and RTCINX2) 1.55 1.6 1.65 V
USBPLLVDD USBPLL supply voltage 1.55 1.6 1.65 V
USBVDD USB module supply voltage, I/O (DP, DN, and PU) 3 3.3 3.6 V
DVDD Device supply voltage, I/O (except DP, DN, PU, SDA, SCL)†2.7 3.3 3.6 V
ADVDD A/D module digital supply voltage 2.7 3.3 3.6 V
AVDD A/D module analog supply voltage 2.7 3.3 3.6 V
Grounds
VSS Supply voltage, GND, I/O, and core 0 V
ADVSS Supply voltage, GND, A/D module, digital 0 V
AVSS Supply voltage, GND, A/D module, analog 0 V
USBPLLVSS Supply voltage, GND, USBPLL 0 V
†The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered down.
Due to the fact that different voltage devices can be connected to the I2C bus, the level of logic 0 (low) and logic 1 (high) are not fixed and
depends on the associated VDD.
‡USB I/O pins DP and DN can tolerate a short circuit at D+ and D− to 0 V or 5 V, as long as the recommended series resistors (see Figure 5−41)
are connected between the D+ and DP (package), and the D− and DN (package). Do not apply a short circuit to the USB I/O pins DP and DN
in absence of the series resistors.
NOTE: USB PLL is susceptible to power supply ripple. The maximum allowable supply ripple is 1% for 1 Hz to 5 kHz; 1.5% for 5 kHz to 10 MHz;
3% for 10 MHz to 100 MHz, and less than 5% for 100 MHz or greater.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
68 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions (Continued)
UNITMAXNOMMIN
X2/CLKIN 2.2 DVDD + 0.3
DN and DP‡2.0
VIH High-level input voltage, I/O SDA & SCL: VDD related input
levels†0.7*DVDD DVDD(max) +0.5 V
All other inputs
(including hysteresis input) 2.2 DVDD + 0.3
X2/CLKIN −0.3 0.7
DN and DP‡0.8
VIL Low-level input voltage, I/O SDA & SCL: VDD related input
levels†−0.5 0.3 * DVDD V
All other inputs
(including hysteresis input) −0.3 0.8
IOH
High-level output current
DN and DP‡ (VOH = 2.45 V) −17.0
mA
IOH High-level output current All other outputs −4 mA
DN and DP‡ (VOL = 0.36 V) 17.0
I
OL
Low-level output current SDA and SCL†3mA
IOL
Low-level output current
All other outputs 4
mA
TCOperating case temperature −40 85 _C
†The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered down.
Due to the fact that different voltage devices can be connected to the I2C bus, the level of logic 0 (low) and logic 1 (high) are not fixed and
depends on the associated VDD.
‡USB I/O pins DP and DN can tolerate a short circuit at D+ and D− to 0 V or 5 V, as long as the recommended series resistors (see Figure 5−41)
are connected between the D+ and DP (package), and the D− and DN (package). Do not apply a short circuit to the USB I/O pins DP and DN
in absence of the series resistors.
NOTE: USB PLL is susceptible to power supply ripple. The maximum allowable supply ripple is 1% for 1 Hz to 5 kHz; 1.5% for 5 kHz to 10 MHz;
3% for 10 MHz to 100 MHz, and less than 5% for 100 MHz or greater.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
69
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Case Temperature
Range (Unless Otherwise Noted)
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT
DN, DP, and PU†DVDD = 3.0 V−3.6 V,
IOH = −300 µA2.8 3.6
VOH High-level output voltage
All other outputs
DVDD = 3.0 V−3.6 V,
IOH = MAX 2.4 V
All other outputs DVDD = 2.7 V−3.0 V,
IOH = MAX 2.2
SDA & SCL‡At 3 mA sink current 0 0.4
V
OL
Low-level output voltage DN and DP†IOL = 3.0 mA 0.3 V
VOL
Low-level output voltage
All other outputs IOL = MAX 0.4
V
IIZ
Input current for outputs in
Output-only or I/O pins with bus
keepers (enabled) DVDD = MAX,
VO = VSS to DVDD − 500 500
A
IIZ
Input current for outputs in
high-impedance All other output-only or I/O pins DVDD = MAX
VO = VSS to DVDD − 5 5
µA
Input pins with internal pulldown
(enabled) DVDD = MAX,
VI = VSS to DVDD 30 300
II
Input current
Input pins with internal pullup
(enabled) DVDD = MAX,
VI = VSS to DVDD − 300 − 30
A
IIInput current X2/CLKIN DVDD = MAX,
VI = VSS to DVDD − 50 50
µA
All other input-only pins DVDD = MAX,
VI = VSS to DVDD − 5 5
IDDC CVDD Supply current, CPU + internal memory access§CVDD = 1.6V
CPU clock = 200 MHz
TC = 25_C0.60 mA/
MHz
IDDP DVDD supply current, pins active¶DVDD = 3.3 V
CPU clock = 200 MHz
TC = 25_C5.5 mA
IDDC CVDD supply current, standby#Oscillator disabled.
All domains in low-power state CVDD = 1.6V
TC = 25_C150 µA
IDDP DVDD supply current, standby Oscillator disabled.
All domains in low-power state.
DVDD = 3.3 V
No I/O activity
TC = 25_C10 µA
CiInput capacitance 3 pF
CoOutput capacitance 3 pF
†USB I/O pins DP and DN can tolerate a short circuit at D+ and D− to 0 V o r 5 V, as long as the recommended serial resistors (see Figure 5−41)
are connected between the D+ and DP (package), and the D− and DN (package). Do not apply a short circuit to the USB I/O pins DP and DN
in absence of the serial resistors.
‡The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered down.
§CPU executing 75% Dual MAC + 25% ADD with moderate data bus activity (table of sine values). CPU and CLKGEN (DPLL) domain are active.
All other domains are idled.
¶One word of a table of a 16-bit sine value is written to the EMIF every 250 ns (64 Mbps). Each EMIF output pin is connected to a 10-pF load.
#In CLKGEN domain idle mode, X2/CLKIN becomes output and is driven low to stop external crystals (if used) from oscillating. Standby current
will be higher if an external clock source tries to drive the X2/CLKIN pin during this time.
NOTE: USB PLL is susceptible to power supply ripple. The maximum allowable supply ripple is 1% for 1 H z t o 5 k H z; 1 . 5% fo r 5 k Hz to 1 0 M Hz;
3% for 10 MHz to 100 MHz, and less than 5% for 100 MHz or greater.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
70 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Transmission Line
4.0 pF 1.85 pF
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
Tester Pin Electronics Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
Output
Under
Test
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line ef fect.
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from
the data sheet timings.
42 Ω3.5 nH
Device Pin
(see note)
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 5−1. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit
5.4 Package Thermal Resistance Characteristics
Table 5−1 provides the estimated thermal resistance characteristics for the recommended package types
used on the TMS320VC5509A DSP.
Table 5−1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics
PARAMETER GHH
PACKAGE PGE
PACKAGE UNIT
RΘJA 54.1 66.7 °C/W
RΘJC 10.0 9.4 °C/W
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
71
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.5 Timing Parameter Symbology
Timing parameter symbols used in the timing requirements and switching characteristics tables are created
in accordance with JEDEC Standard 100. To shorten the symbols, some of the pin names and other related
terminology have been abbreviated as follows:
Lowercase subscripts and their meanings: Letters and symbols and their meanings:
a access time H High
c cycle time (period) L Low
d delay time V Valid
dis disable time Z High-impedance
en enable time
f fall time
h hold time
r rise time
su setup time
t transition time
v valid time
w pulse duration (width)
X Unknown, changing, or don’t care level
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
72 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.6 Clock Options
The frequency of the reference clock provided at the X2/CLKIN pin can be divided by a factor of two or four
or multiplied by one of several values to generate the internal machine cycle.
5.6.1 Internal System Oscillator With External Crystal
The internal oscillator is always enabled following a device reset. The oscillator requires an external crystal
or ceramic resonator connected across the X1 and X2/CLKIN pins. If the internal oscillator is not used, an
external clock source must be applied to the X2/CLKIN pin and the X1 pin should be left unconnected. Since
the internal oscillator can be used as a clock source to the PLLs, the crystal oscillation frequency can be
multiplied to generate the CPU clock and USB clock, if desired.
The crystal should be in fundamental-mode operation, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective series
resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5−2. The connection of the required circuit is shown in Figure 5−2. Under
some conditions, all the components shown are not required. The capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen
such that the equation below is satisfied. CL in the equation is the load specified for the crystal that is also
specified in Table 5−2.
CL+C1C2
(C1)C2)
X2/CLKIN X1
C1 C2
Crystal RS
Figure 5−2. Internal System Oscillator With External Crystal
Table 5−2. Recommended Crystal Parameters
FREQUENCY RANGE (MHz) MAX ESR (Ω) CLOAD (pF) MAX CSHUNT (pF) RS (kΩ)
20−15 40 10 7 0
15−12 40 16 7 0
12−10 40 16 7 2.8
10−8 60 18 7 2.2
8−6 60 18 7 8.8
6−5 80 18 7 14.0
Although the recommended ESR presented in Table 5−2 as a maximum, theoretically, a crystal with a lower
maximum ESR might seem to meet the requirement. It is recommended that crystals which meet the
maximum ESR specification in Table 5−2 are used.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
73
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.6.2 Layout Considerations
Since parasitic capacitance, inductance and resistance can be significant in any circuit, good PC board layout
practices should always be observed when planning trace routing to the discrete components used in the
oscillator circuit. Specifically, the crystal and the associated discrete components should be located as close
to the DSP as physically possible. Also, X1 and X2/CLKIN traces should be separated as soon as possible
after routing away from the DSP to minimize parasitic capacitance between them, and a ground trace should
be run between these two signal lines. This also helps to minimize stray capacitance between these two
signals.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
74 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.6.3 Clock Generation in Bypass Mode (DPLL Disabled)
The frequency of the reference clock provided at the X2/CLKIN pin can be divided by a factor of one, two, or
four to generate the internal CPU clock cycle. The divide factor (D) is set in the BYPASS_DIV field of the clock
mode register. The contents of this field only affect clock generation while the device is in bypass mode. In
this mode, the digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) clock synthesis is disabled.
Table 5−3 and Table 5−4 assume testing over recommended operating conditions and H = 0.5tc(CO) (see
Figure 5−3).
Table 5−3. CLKIN Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
C1 tc(CI) Cycle time, X2/CLKIN 20 400†ns
C2 tf(CI) Fall time, X2/CLKIN 4 ns
C3 tr(CI) Rise time, X2/CLKIN 4 ns
C10 tw(CIL) Pulse duration, CLKIN low 6 ns
C11 tw(CIH) Pulse duration, CLKIN high 6 ns
†This device utilizes a fully static design and therefore can operate with tc(CI) approaching ∞. If an external crystal is used, the X2/CLKIN cycle
time is limited by the crystal frequency range listed in Table 5−2.
Table 5−4. CLKOUT Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT
C4 tc(CO) Cycle time, CLKOUT 20‡D*tc(CI)§1600†ns
C5 td(CIH-CO) Delay time, X2/CLKIN high to CLKOUT high/low 10 20 30 ns
C6 tf(CO) Fall time, CLKOUT 1 ns
C7 tr(CO) Rise time, CLKOUT 1 ns
C8 tw(COL) Pulse duration, CLKOUT low H−2 H+2 ns
C9 tw(COH) Pulse duration, CLKOUT high H−2 H+2 ns
†This device utilizes a fully static design and therefore can operate with tc(CO) approaching ∞. If an external crystal is used, the X2/CLKIN cycle
time is limited by the crystal frequency range listed in Table 5−2.
‡It is recommended that the DPLL synthesised clocking option be used to obtain maximum operating frequency.
§D = 1/(PLL Bypass Divider)
C3 C2
C1
C4
C5
C7
C6 C8
C9
X2/CLKIN
CLKOUT
C10 C11
NOTE A: The relationship of X2/CLKIN to CLKOUT depends on the PLL bypass divide factor chosen for the CLKMD register. The waveform
relationship shown in Figure 5−3 is intended to illustrate the timing parameters based on CLKOUT = 1/2(CLKIN) configuration.
Figure 5−3. Bypass Mode Clock Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
75
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.6.4 Clock Generation in Lock Mode (DPLL Synthesis Enabled)
The frequency of the reference clock provided at the X2/CLKIN pin can be multiplied by a synthesis factor of
N to generate the internal CPU clock cycle. The synthesis factor is determined by:
N=M
DL
where: M = the multiply factor set in the PLL_MULT field of the clock mode register
DL = the divide factor set in the PLL_DIV field of the clock mode register
Valid values for M are (multiply by) 2 to 31. Valid values for DL are (divide by) 1, 2, 3, and 4.
For detailed information on clock generation configuration, see the TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview
Reference Guide (literature number SPRU317).
Table 5−5 and Table 5−6 assume testing over recommended operating conditions and H = 0.5tc(CO) (see
Figure 5−4).
Table 5−5. Multiply-By-N Clock Option Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
C1 tc(CI) Cycle time, X2/CLKIN DPLL synthesis enabled 20†400 ns
C2 tf(CI) Fall time, X2/CLKIN 4 ns
C3 tr(CI) Rise time, X2/CLKIN 4 ns
C10 tw(CIL) Pulse duration, CLKIN low 6 ns
C11 tw(CIH) Pulse duration, CLKIN high 6 ns
†The clock frequency synthesis factor and minimum X2/CLKIN cycle time should be chosen such that the resulting CLKOUT cycle time is within
the specified range (tc(CO)). If an external crystal is used, the X2/CLKIN cycle time is limited by the crystal frequency range listed in Table 5−2.
Table 5−6. Multiply-By-N Clock Option Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT
C4 tc(CO) Cycle time, CLKOUT 5 tc(CI)*N‡1600 ns
C12 td(CI–CO) Delay time, X2/CLKIN high/low to CLKOUT high/low 10 20 30 ns
C6 tf(CO) Fall time, CLKOUT 1 ns
C7 tr(CO) Rise time, CLKOUT 1 ns
C8 tw(COL) Pulse duration, CLKOUT low H−2 H+2 ns
C9 tw(COH) Pulse duration, CLKOUT high H−2 H+2 ns
‡N = Clock frequency synthesis factor
C1 C3 C2
C12
C4
C8 C9
C6
C7
X2/CLKIN
CLKOUT Bypass Mode
C3
C10 C11
NOTE A: The relationship of X2/CLKIN to CLKOUT depends on the PLL multiply and divide factor chosen for the CLKMD register. The waveform
relationship shown in Figure 5−3 is intended to illustrate the timing parameters based on CLKOUT = 1xCLKIN configuration.
Figure 5−4. External Multiply-by-N Clock Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
76 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.6.5 Real-Time Clock Oscillator With External Crystal
The real-time clock module includes an oscillator circuit. The oscillator requires an external 32.768-kHz crystal
connected across the RTCINX1 and RTCINX2 pins. The connection of the required circuit, consisting of the
crystal and two load capacitors, is shown in Figure 5−5. The load capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen
such that the equation below is satisfied. CL in the equation is the load specified for the crystal.
CL+C1C2
(C1)C2)
RTCINX1 RTCINX2
C1 C2
32.768 kHz
Crystal
Figure 5−5. Real-Time Clock Oscillator With External Crystal
NOTE: The RTC can be idled by not supplying its 32-kHz oscillator signal. In order to keep
RTC power dissipation to a minimum when the RTC module is not used, it is recommended
that the RTC module be powered up, the RTC input pin (R TCINX1) be pulled low, and the RTC
output pin (RTCINX2) be left floating.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
77
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.7 Memory Interface Timings
5.7.1 Asynchronous Memory Timings
Table 5−7 and Table 5−8 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−6 and
Figure 5−7).
Table 5−7. Asynchronous Memory Cycle Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
M1 tsu(DV-COH) Setup time, read data valid before CLKOUT high†5 ns
M2 th(COH-DV) Hold time, read data valid after CLKOUT high 0 ns
M3 tsu(ARDY-COH) Setup time, ARDY valid before CLKOUT high†8 ns
M4 th(COH-ARDY) Hold time, ARDY valid after CLKOUT high 0 ns
†To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. If ARDY does meet setup or hold
time, it may be recognized in the current cycle or the next cycle. Thus, ARDY can be an asynchronous input.
Table 5−8. Asynchronous Memory Cycle Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
M5 td(COH-CEV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to CEx valid 0 4 ns
M6 td(COH-CEIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to CEx invalid 0 4 ns
M7 td(COH-BEV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to BEx valid 4 ns
M8 td(COH-BEIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to BEx invalid 0 ns
M9 td(COH-AV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to address valid 4 ns
M10 td(COH-AIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to address invalid 0 ns
M11 td(COH-AOEV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to AOE valid −2 2 ns
M12 td(COH-AOEIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to AOE invalid −2 2 ns
M13 td(COH-AREV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to ARE valid −2 2 ns
M14 td(COH-AREIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to ARE invalid −2 2 ns
M15 td(COH-DV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to data valid 4 ns
M16 td(COH-DIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to data invalid 0 ns
M17 td(COH-AWEV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to AWE valid −2 4 ns
M18 td(COH-AWEIV) Delay time, CLKOUT high to AWE invalid −2 4 ns
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
78 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Setup = 2 Strobe = 5 Not Ready = 2 Hold
= 1 Extended
Hold = 2
CLKOUT†
CEx‡
BEx
A[20:0]§
D[15:0]
AOE
ARE
AWE
ARDY
M5
M7
M6
M8
M9 M10
M1 M2
M12
M14
M11
M13
M3
M4
M3
M4
†CLKOUT is equal to CPU clock
‡CEx becomes active depending on the memory address space being accessed
§A[13:0] for LQFP
Figure 5−6. Asynchronous Memory Read Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
79
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Setup = 2 Strobe = 5 Not Ready = 2 Hold = 1
Extended
Hold = 2
M17
C
LKOUT†
CEx‡
BEx
A[20:0]§
D[15:0]
AOE
ARE
AWE
ARDY
M3
M4
M7
M6
M8
M9 M10
M18
M3M4
M15 M16
M5
†CLKOUT is equal to CPU clock
‡CEx becomes active depending on the memory address space being accessed
§A[13:0] for LQFP
Figure 5−7. Asynchronous Memory Write Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
80 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.7.2 Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) Timings
Table 5−9 and Table 5−10 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−8 through
Figure 5−14).
Table 5−9. Synchronous DRAM Cycle Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
M19 tsu(DV-CLKMEMH) Setup time, read data valid before CLKMEM high 3 ns
M20 th(CLKMEMH-DV) Hold time, read data valid after CLKMEM high 2 ns
M21 tc(CLKMEM) Cycle time, CLKMEM 10†ns
†Maximum SDRAM operating frequency supported is 100 MHz.
Table 5−10. Synchronous DRAM Cycle Switching Characteristics [SDRAM Clock = (1/2)X of CPU Clock]
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
M22 td(CLKMEMH-CEL) Delay time, CLKMEM high to CEx low 1.5 5 ns
M23 td(CLKMEMH-CEH) Delay time, CLKMEM high to CEx high 1.5 5 ns
M24 td(CLKMEMH-BEV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to BEx valid 1.5 5 ns
M25 td(CLKMEMH-BEIV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to BEx invalid 1.5 5 ns
M26 td(CLKMEMH-AV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to address valid 1.5 5 ns
M27 td(CLKMEMH-AIV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to address invalid 1.5 5 ns
M28 td(CLKMEMH-SDCASL) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDCAS low 1.5 5 ns
M29 td(CLKMEMH-SDCASH) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDCAS high 1.5 5 ns
M30 td(CLKMEMH-DV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to data valid 1.5 5 ns
M31 td(CLKMEMH-DIV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to data invalid 1.5 5 ns
M32 td(CLKMEMH-SDWEL) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDWE low 1.5 5 ns
M33 td(CLKMEMH-SDWEH) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDWE high 1.5 5 ns
M34 td(CLKMEMH-SDA10V) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDA10 valid 1.5 5 ns
M35 td(CLKMEMH-SDA10IV) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDA10 invalid 1.5 5 ns
M36 td(CLKMEMH-SDRASL) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDRAS low 1.5 5 ns
M37 td(CLKMEMH-SDRASH) Delay time, CLKMEM high to SDRAS high 1.5 5 ns
M38 td(CLKMEMH–CKEL) Delay time, CLKMEM high to CKE low 1.5 5 ns
M39 td(CLKMEMH–CKEH) Delay time, CLKMEM high to CKE high 1.5 5 ns
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
81
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
M22
M24
M26
M27 M23
M34
M28
M35
M29
M19 M20
D1 D2 D3
CLKMEM
CEx†
BEx‡
EMIF.A[13:0]
D[15:0]
SDA10
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
READ READ READ
CA1 CA2 CA3
M21
†The chip enable that becomes active depends on the address being accessed.
‡All BE[1:0] signals are driven low (active) during reads. Byte manipulation of the read data is performed inside the EMIF. These signals remain
active until the next access that is not an SDRAM read occurs.
Figure 5−8. Three SDRAM Read Commands
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
82 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
WRITE WRITE WRITE
M22
M24
M26
M30
M34
M28
M32
M25
M27
M31
M23
M35
M29
M33
BE1 BE2 BE3
CA1 CA2 CA3
D1 D2 D3
CLKMEM
CEx†
BEx‡
EMIF.A[13:0]
D[15:0]
SDA10
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
†The chip enable that becomes active depends on the address being accessed.
‡All BE[1:0] signals are driven low (active) during reads. Byte manipulation of the read data is performed inside the EMIF. These signals remain
active until the next access that is not an SDRAM read occurs.
Figure 5−9. Three SDRAM WRT Commands
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
83
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
M23
M37
M22
M26
M34
M36
CLKMEM
CEx†
BEx‡
EMIF.A[13:0]
D[15:0]
SDA10
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
ACTV
Bank Activate/Row Address
†The chip enable that becomes active depends on the address being accessed.
‡All BE[1:0] signals are driven low (active) during reads. Byte manipulation of the read data is performed inside the EMIF. These signals remain
active until the next access that is not an SDRAM read occurs.
Figure 5−10. SDRAM ACTV Command
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
84 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
M23
M37
M22
M36
CLKMEM
CEx†
BEx‡
EMIF.A[13:0]
D[15:0]
SDA10
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
M34 M35
M32 M33
DCAB
†The chip enable that becomes active depends on the address being accessed.
‡All BE[1:0] signals are driven low (active) during reads. Byte manipulation of the read data is performed inside the EMIF. These signals remain
active until the next access that is not an SDRAM read occurs.
Figure 5−11. SDRAM DCAB Command
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
85
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
M23
M37
M22
M36
CLKMEM
CEx†
BEx‡
EMIF.A[13:0]
D[15:0]
SDA10
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
M28 M29
REFR
†The chip enable that becomes active depends on the address being accessed.
‡All BE[1:0] signals are driven low (active) during reads. Byte manipulation of the read data is performed inside the EMIF. These signals
remain active until the next access that is not an SDRAM read occurs.
Figure 5−12. SDRAM REFR Command
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
86 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
M23
M37
M22
M36
CLKMEM
CEx†
BEx‡
EMIF.A[13:0]
D[15:0]
SDA10
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
M32 M33
MRS
MRS Value 0x30§
M26 M27
M28 M29
†The chip enable that becomes active depends on the address being accessed.
‡All BE[1:0] signals are driven low (active) during reads. Byte manipulation of the read data is performed inside the EMIF. These signals remain
active until the next access that is not an SDRAM read occurs.
§Write burst length = 1
Read latency = 3
Burst type = 0 (serial)
Burst length = 1
Figure 5−13. SDRAM MRS Command
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
87
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Enter Self-Refresh Exit Self-Refresh
M38 M39
M22 M23
M36
M28
CLKMEM
CKE
(XF or GPIO4)
CEx
SDRAS
SDCAS
SDWE
SDA10
Figure 5−14. SDRAM Self-Refresh Command
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
88 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.8 Reset Timings
5.8.1 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Active)
Table 5−11 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−15).
Table 5−11. Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Active) Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
R1 th(SUPSTBL-RSTL) Hold time, RESET low after oscillator stable†3P‡ns
†Oscillator stable time depends on the crystal characteristic (i.e., frequency, ESR, etc.) which varies from one crystal manufacturer to another.
Based on the crystal characteristics, the oscillator stable time can be in the range of a few to 10s of ms. A reset circuit with 100 ms or more delay
time will ensure the oscillator stabilized before the RESET goes high.
‡P = 1/(input clock frequency) in ns. For example, when input clock is 12 MHz, P = 83.33 ns.
R1
CLKOUT
CVDD
DVDD
RESET
Figure 5−15. Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Active) Timings
5.8.2 Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive)
Table 5−12 and Table 5−13 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−16).
Table 5−12. Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
R2 th(CLKOUTV-RSTL) Hold time, CLKOUT valid to RESET low 3P‡ns
‡P = 1/(input clock frequency) in ns. For example, when input clock is 12 MHz, P = 83.33 ns.
Table 5−13. Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
R3 td(CLKINV-CLKOUTV) Delay time, CLKIN valid to CLKOUT valid 30 ns
CVDD
DVDD
R3
R2
CLKOUT
X2/CLKIN
RESET
Figure 5−16. Power-Up Reset (On-Chip Oscillator Inactive) Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
89
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.8.3 Warm Reset
Table 5−14 and Table 5−15 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−17).
Table 5−14. Reset Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
R4 tw(RSL) Pulse width, reset low 3P † ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
Table 5−15. Reset Switching Characteristics†
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
R5 td(RSTH-BKV) Delay time, reset high to BK group valid‡38P + 15 ns
R6 td(RSTH-HIGHV) Delay time, reset high to High group valid§38P + 15 ns
R7 td(RSTL-ZIV) Delay time, reset low to Z group invalid¶1P + 15 ns
R8 td(RSTH-ZV) Delay time, reset high to Z group valid¶38P + 15 ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
‡BK group: Pins with bus keepers, holds previous state during reset. Following low-to-high transition of RESET, these pins go to their post-reset
logic state.
BK group pins: A’[0], A[15:0], D[15:0], C[14:2], C0, GPIO5, S13, and S23
§High group: Following low-to-high transition of RESET, these pins go to logic-high state.
High group pins: C1[HPI.HINT], XF
¶Z group: Bidirectional pins which become input or output pins. Following low-to-high transition of RESET, these pins go to high-impedance state.
Z group pins: C1[EMIF.AOE], GPIO[7:6, 4:0], TIN/TOUT0, SDA, SCL, CLKR0, FSRX0, CLKX0, DX0, FSX0, S[25:24, 22:20, 15:14, 12:10],
A[20:16]
RESET
BK Group†
H
igh Group‡
Z Group§
R5
R7
R6
R8
†BK group pins: A’[0], A[15:0], D[15:0], C[14:2], C0, GPIO5, S13, and S23
‡High group pins: C1[HPI.HINT], XF
§Z group pins: C1[EMIF.AOE], GPIO[7:6, 4:0], TIN/TOUT0, SDA, SCL, CLKR0, FSRX0, CLKX0, DX0, FSX0, S[25:24, 22:20, 15:14, 12:10]
,
A[20:16]
Figure 5−17. Reset Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
90 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.9 External Interrupt Timings
Table 5−16 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−18).
Table 5−16. External Interrupt Timing Requirements†
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
I1 tw(INTL)A Pulse width, interrupt low, CPU active 3P ns
I2 tw(INTH)A Pulse width, interrupt high, CPU active 2P ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
I1
I2
INTn
Figure 5−18. External Interrupt Timings
5.10 Wake-Up From IDLE
Table 5−17 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−19).
Table 5−17. Wake-Up From IDLE Switching Characteristics†
NO. PARAMETER MIN TYP MAX UNIT
ID1 td(WKPEVTL-CLKGEN) Delay time, wake-up event low to clock generation enable
(CPU and clock domain idle) 1.25‡ms
ID2 th(CLKGEN-WKPEVTL) Hold time, clock generation enable to wake-up event low
(CPU and clock domain in idle) 3P§ns
ID3 tw(WKPEVTL) Pulse width, wake-up event low (for CPU idle only) 3P ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
‡Estimated data based on 12-MHz crystal used with on-chip oscillator at 25°C. This number will vary based on the actual crystal characteristics
(e.g., frequency, ESR, etc.). This parameter will be updated with a more accurate value when the characterization data becomes available.
§Following the clock generation domain idle, the INTx becomes level-sensitive and stays that way until the low-to-high transition of INTx following
the CPU wake-up. Holding the INTx low longer than minimum requirement will send more than one interrupt to the CPU. The number of interrupts
sent to the CPU depends on the INTx-low time following the CPU wake-up from IDLE.
ID1
ID2
ID3
X1
RESET,
INTx
Figure 5−19. Wake-Up From IDLE Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
91
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.11 XF Timings
Table 5−18 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−20).
Table 5−18. XF Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
X1
td(XF)
Delay time, CLKOUT high to XF high 0 3
ns
X1 td(XF) Delay time, CLKOUT high to XF low 0 3 ns
X1
CLKOUT†
XF
†CLKOUT reflects the CPU clock.
Figure 5−20. XF Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
92 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.12 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIOx) Timings
Table 5−19 and Table 5−20 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−21).
Table 5−19. GPIO Pins Configured as Inputs Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
GPIO 6
G1 t
su(GPIO-COH)
Setup time, IOx input valid before CLKOUT high AGPIO†8ns
G1
tsu(GPIO-COH)
Setup time, IOx input valid before CLKOUT high
EHPIGPIO‡8
ns
GPIO 0
G2 th(COH-GPIO) Hold time, IOx input valid after CLKOUT high AGPIO†0ns
h(COH-GPIO)
EHPIGPIO‡0
†AGPIO pins: A[15:0]
‡EHPIGPIO pins: C13, C10, C7, C5, C4, and C0
Table 5−20. GPIO Pins Configured as Outputs Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
GPIO 0 5
G3 td(COH-GPIO) Delay time, CLKOUT high to IOx output change AGPIO†1 9 ns
d(COH-GPIO)
EHPIGPIO‡1 9
†AGPIO pins: A[15:0]
‡EHPIGPIO pins: C13, C10, C7, C5, C4, and C0
G3
G1
G2
CLKOUT†
IOx
Input Mode
IOx
Output Mode
†CLKOUT reflects the CPU clock.
Figure 5−21. General-Purpose Input/Output (IOx) Signal Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
93
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.13 TIN/TOUT Timings (Timer0 Only)
Table 5−21 and Table 5−22 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−22 and
Figure 5−23).
Table 5−21. TIN/TOUT Pins Configured as Inputs Timing Requirements†‡
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
T4 tw(TIN/TOUTL) Pulse width, TIN/TOUT low 2P + 1 ns
T5 tw(TIN/TOUTH) Pulse width, TIN/TOUT high 2P + 1 ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
‡Only the Timer0 signal is externally available. The Timer1 signal is internally terminated and is not available for external use.
Table 5−22. TIN/TOUT Pins Configured as Outputs Switching Characteristics†‡§
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
T1 td(COH-TIN/TOUTH) Delay time, CLKOUT high to TIN/TOUT high 0 3 ns
T2 td(COH-TIN/TOUTL) Delay time, CLKOUT high to TIN/TOUT low 0 3 ns
T3 tw(TIN/TOUT) Pulse duration, TIN/TOUT (output) P − 1 ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
‡Only the Timer0 signal is externally available. The Timer1 signal is internally terminated and is not available for external use.
§For proper operation of the TIN/TOUT pin configured as an output, the timer period must be configured for at least 4 cycles.
TIN/TOUT
as Input
T5 T4
Figure 5−22. TIN/TOUT Timings When Configured as Inputs
TIN/TOUT
as Output
CLKOUT
T2
T1 T3
Figure 5−23. TIN/TOUT Timings When Configured as Outputs
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
94 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.14 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timings
5.14.1 McBSP0 Timings
Table 5−23 and Table 5−24 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−24 and
Figure 5−25).
Table 5−23. McBSP0 Timing Requirements†
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
MC1 tc(CKRX) Cycle time, CLKR/X CLKR/X ext 2P‡ns
MC2 tw(CKRX) Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low CLKR/X ext P–1‡ns
MC3 tr(CKRX) Rise time, CLKR/X CLKR/X ext 6 ns
MC4 tf(CKRX) Fall time, CLKR/X CLKR/X ext 6 ns
MC5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
CLKR int 10
ns
MC5 tsu(FRH-CKRL) Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low CLKR ext 2ns
MC6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
CLKR int 1
ns
MC6 th(CKRL-FRH) Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low CLKR ext 2ns
MC7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
CLKR int 10
ns
MC7 tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low CLKR ext 2ns
MC8
th(CKRL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
CLKR int 1
ns
MC8 th(CKRL-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low CLKR ext 3ns
MC9
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
CLKX int 10
ns
MC9 tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low CLKX ext 2ns
MC10
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKX int 1
ns
MC10 th(CKXL-FXH) Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low CLKX ext 2ns
†Polarity bits CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If the polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are
also inverted.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
95
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 5−24. McBSP0 Switching Characteristics†‡
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
MC1 tc(CKRX) Cycle time, CLKR/X CLKR/X int 2P ns
MC3 tr(CKRX) Rise time, CLKR/X CLKR/X int 2 ns
MC4 tf(CKRX) Fall time, CLKR/X CLKR/X int 2 ns
MC11 tw(CKRXH) Pulse duration, CLKR/X high CLKR/X int D−1§D+1§ns
MC12 tw(CKRXL) Pulse duration, CLKR/X low CLKR/X int C−1§C+1§ns
MC13
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int −1 1
ns
MC13 td(CKRH-FRV) Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid CLKR ext 4 12 ns
MC14
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
CLKX int 1 2
ns
MC14 td(CKXH-FXV) Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid CLKX ext 4 14 ns
MC15
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high-impedance from CLKX high
CLKX int −4 0
ns
MC15 tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high-impedance from CLKX high
following last data bit CLKX ext 311 ns
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid.
CLKX int 3
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid.
This applies to all bits except the first bit transmitted. CLKX ext 13
MC16
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid¶
DXENA = 0
CLKX int 3
ns
MC16
t
d(CKXH-DXV)
Only applies to first bit transmitted
DXENA = 0
CLKX ext 13
ns
Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
DXENA = 1
CLKX int 2P + 3
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
(XDATDLY=01b or 10b) modes
DXENA = 1
CLKX ext 2P + 13
Enable time, DX driven from CLKX
high¶
DXENA = 0
CLKX int −3
MC17
ten(CKXH-DX)
high¶
DXENA = 0
CLKX ext 4
ns
MC17
t
en(CKXH-DX) Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
DXENA = 1
CLKX int P − 3
ns
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
(XDATDLY=01b or 10b) modes
DXENA = 1
CLKX ext P + 4
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid¶
DXENA = 0
FSX int 2
MC18
td(FXH-DXV)
Only applies to first bit transmitted
DXENA = 0
FSX ext 12
ns
MC18
t
d(FXH-DXV) Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
DXENA = 1
FSX int 2P + 2
ns
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
mode.
DXENA = 1
FSX ext 2P + 12
Enable time, DX driven from FSX high¶
DXENA = 0
FSX int 0
MC19
ten(FXH-DX)
Only applies to first bit transmitted
DXENA = 0
FSX ext 4
ns
MC19
t
en(FXH-DX) Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
DXENA = 1
FSX int P − 3
ns
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
mode
DXENA = 1
FSX ext P + 5
†Polarity bits CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If the polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal ar e
also inverted.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
§T=CLKRX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * P
C=CLKRX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) * P when CLKGDV is even
D=CLKRX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * P when CLKGDV is even
¶See the TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU317) for a description of the DX enable (DXENA)
and data delay features of the McBSP.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
96 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.14.2 McBSP1 and McBSP2 Timings
Table 5−25 and Table 5−26 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−24 and
Figure 5−25).
Table 5−25. McBSP1 and McBSP2 Timing Requirements†
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
MC1 tc(CKRX) Cycle time, CLKR/X CLKR/X ext 2P‡ns
MC2 tw(CKRX) Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low CLKR/X ext P–1‡ns
MC3 tr(CKRX) Rise time, CLKR/X CLKR/X ext 6 ns
MC4 tf(CKRX) Fall time, CLKR/X CLKR/X ext 6 ns
MC5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
CLKR int 10
ns
MC5 tsu(FRH-CKRL) Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low CLKR ext 0ns
MC6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
CLKR int −2
ns
MC6 th(CKRL-FRH) Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low CLKR ext 2ns
MC7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
CLKR int 10
ns
MC7 tsu(DRV-CKRL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low CLKR ext 0ns
MC8
th(CKRL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
CLKR int −2
ns
MC8 th(CKRL-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low CLKR ext 3ns
MC9
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
CLKX int 10
ns
MC9 tsu(FXH-CKXL) Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low CLKX ext 2ns
MC10
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
CLKX int −3
ns
MC10 th(CKXL-FXH) Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low CLKX ext 2ns
†Polarity bits CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If the polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are
also inverted.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
97
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 5−26. McBSP1 and McBSP2 Switching Characteristics†‡
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
MC1 tc(CKRX) Cycle time, CLKR/X CLKR/X int 2P ns
MC3 tr(CKRX) Rise time, CLKR/X CLKR/X int 2 ns
MC4 tf(CKRX) Fall time, CLKR/X CLKR/X int 2 ns
MC11 tw(CKRXH) Pulse duration, CLKR/X high CLKR/X int D−1§D+1§ns
MC12 tw(CKRXL) Pulse duration, CLKR/X low CLKR/X int C−1§C+1§ns
MC13
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int −2 0
ns
MC13 td(CKRH-FRV) Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid CLKR ext 4 12 ns
MC14
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
CLKX int 0 2
ns
MC14 td(CKXH-FXV) Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid CLKX ext 5 13 ns
MC15
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high-impedance from CLKX high
CLKX int −5 0
ns
MC15 tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high-impedance from CLKX high
following last data bit CLKX ext 4 12 ns
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid.
CLKX int 6
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid.
This applies to all bits except the first bit transmitted. CLKX ext 16
MC16
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid¶
DXENA = 0
CLKX int 2
ns
MC16
t
d(CKXH-DXV)
Only applies to first bit transmitted
DXENA = 0
CLKX ext 14
ns
Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
DXENA = 1
CLKX int 2P + 2
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
(XDATDLY=01b or 10b) modes
DXENA = 1
CLKX ext 2P + 14
Enable time, DX driven from CLKX
high¶
DXENA = 0
CLKX int −4
MC17
ten(CKXH-DX)
high¶
DXENA = 0
CLKX ext 4
ns
MC17
t
en(CKXH-DX) Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
DXENA = 1
CLKX int P − 3
ns
when in Data Delay 1 or 2
(XDATDLY=01b or 10b) modes
DXENA = 1
CLKX ext P + 4
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid¶
DXENA = 0
FSX int 2
MC18
td(FXH-DXV)
Only applies to first bit transmitted
DXENA = 0
FSX ext 14
ns
MC18
t
d(FXH-DXV) Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
DXENA = 1
FSX int 2P + 2
ns
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
mode.
DXENA = 1
FSX ext 2P + 14
Enable time, DX driven from FSX high¶
DXENA = 0
FSX int 1
MC19
ten(FXH-DX)
Only applies to first bit transmitted
DXENA = 0
FSX ext 4
ns
MC19
t
en(FXH-DX) Only applies to first bit transmitted
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
DXENA = 1
FSX int P − 3
ns
when in Data Delay 0 (XDATDLY=00b)
mode
DXENA = 1
FSX ext P + 6
†Polarity bits CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If the polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal ar e
also inverted.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
§T=CLKRX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * P
C=CLKRX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) * P when CLKGDV is even
D=CLKRX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * P when CLKGDV is even
¶See the TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU317) for a description of the DX enable (DXENA)
and data delay features of the McBSP.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
98 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
MC2, MC12
MC2, MC11
MC1
MC3
MC4
MC13 MC13
MC5 MC6
MC7 MC8
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3)
Bit (n−1) (n−2)
MC7 MC8
MC7 MC8
CLKR
FSR (Int)
FSR (Ext)
DR
(RDATDLY=00b)
DR
(RDATDLY=01b)
DR
(RDATDLY=10b)
Figure 5−24. McBSP Receive Timings
MC2, MC12
MC2, MC11
MC1
MC3 MC4
MC14 MC14
MC9 MC10
MC19 MC18 MC16
MC16
MC16
MC17
MC15
MC17
Bit 0 Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3)
Bit (n−1) (n−2)
CLKX
FSX (Int)
FSX (Ext)
DX
(XDATDLY=00b)
DX
(XDATDLY=01b)
DX
(XDATDLY=10b)
Figure 5−25. McBSP Transmit Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
99
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.14.3 McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timings
Table 5−27 to Table 5−34 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−26 through
Figure 5−29).
Table 5−27. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0)†‡
NO.
MASTER SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC23 tsu(DRV-CKXL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low 10 2 − 6P ns
MC24 th(CKXL-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low 02 + 6P ns
MC25 tsu(FXL-CKXH) Setup time, FSX low before CLKX high 10 ns
MC26 tc(CKX) Cycle time, CLKX 2P 16P ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
Table 5−28. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0)†‡
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC27 td(CKXL-FXL) Delay time, CLKX low to FSX low¶T − 1 T + 1 ns
MC28 td(FXL-CKXH) Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#C − 1 C + 1 ns
MC29 td(CKXH-DXV) Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid 0 1 3P + 5 5P + 12 ns
MC30 tdis(CKXL-DXHZ) Disable time, DX high-impedance following last data bit
from CLKX low C − 2 C ns
MC31 tdis(FXH-DXHZ) Disable time, DX high-impedance following last data bit
from FSX high 3P+ 4 3P + 10 ns
MC32 td(FXL-DXV) Delay time, FSX low to DX valid 3P + 4 3P + 12 ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
§T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * 2P
C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) * 2P when CLKGDV is even
¶FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
#FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
LSB MC25
MC27
MC28
MC26
MC31
MC30
MC29
MC23 MC24
MSB
CLKX
FSX
DX
DR
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)Bit 0
Bit 0 Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)
MC32
Figure 5−26. McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
100 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 5−29. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0)†‡
NO.
MASTER SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC33 tsu(DRV-CKXH) Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high 10 2 − 6P ns
MC34 th(CKXH-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high 02 + 6P ns
MC25 tsu(FXL-CKXH) Setup time, FSX low before CLKX high 10 ns
MC26 tc(CKX) Cycle time, CLKX 2P 16P ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
Table 5−30. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0)†‡
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC27 td(CKXL-FXL) Delay time, CLKX low to FSX low¶C + 1 C + 2 ns
MC28 td(FXL-CKXH) Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#T + 1 T + 2 ns
MC35 td(CKXL-DXV) Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid 0 1 3P + 4 5P + 12 ns
MC30 tdis(CKXL-DXHZ) Disable time, DX high-impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low −2 1 3P + 4 3P + 12 ns
MC32 td(FXL-DXV) Delay time, FSX low to DX valid D − 3 D + 1 3P + 4 3P + 10 ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
§T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * P
C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) * P when CLKGDV is even
D = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * P when CLKGDV is even
¶FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
#FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
LSB MC25
MC28
MC26
MC35
MC33 MC34
MSB
CLKX
FSX
DX
DR
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)Bit 0
Bit 0 Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)
MC27
MC30 MC32
Figure 5−27. McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
101
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 5−31. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1)†‡
NO.
MASTER SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC33 tsu(DRV-CKXH) Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high 10 2 − 6P ns
MC34 th(CKXH-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high 02 + 6P ns
MC36 tsu(FXL-CKXL) Setup time, FSX low before CLKX low 10 ns
MC26 tc(CKX) Cycle time, CLKX 2P 16P ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
Table 5−32. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1)†‡
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC37 td(CKXH-FXL) Delay time, CLKX high to FSX low¶T − 1 T + 1 ns
MC38 td(FXL-CKXL) Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#D − 1 D + 1 ns
MC35 td(CKXL-DXV) Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid 0 1 3P + 5 5P + 12 ns
MC39 tdis(CKXH-DXHZ) Disable time, DX high-impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high D − 2 D ns
MC31 tdis(FXH-DXHZ) Disable time, DX high-impedance following last data bit from
FSX high 3P + 4 3P +10 ns
MC32 td(FXL-DXV) Delay time, FSX low to DX valid 3P + 4 3P + 12 ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
§T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * P
C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) * P when CLKGDV is even
D = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * P when CLKGDV is even
¶FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
#FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
LSB MC36
MC37
MC38
MC26
MC31
MC39
MC35
MC33 MC34
MSB
CLKX
FSX
DX
DR
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)Bit 0
Bit 0 Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)
MC32
Figure 5−28. McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
102 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
Table 5−33. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Timing Requirements (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1)†‡
NO.
MASTER SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC23 tsu(DRV-CKXL) Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low 10 2 − 6P ns
MC24 th(CKXL-DRV) Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low 02 + 6P ns
MC36 tsu(FXL-CKXL) Setup time, FSX low before CLKX low 10 ns
MC26 tc(CKX) Cycle time, CLKX 2P 16P ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
Table 5−34. McBSP as SPI Master or Slave Switching Characteristics (CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1)†‡
NO.
PARAMETER
MASTER§SLAVE
UNIT
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
MC37 td(CKXH-FXL) Delay time, CLKX high to FSX low¶DD + 2 ns
MC38 td(FXL-CKXL) Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#TT + 2 ns
MC29 td(CKXH-DXV) Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid 0 1 3P + 4 5P + 12 ns
MC39 tdis(CKXH-DXHZ) Disable time, DX high-impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high −1 1 3P + 4 3P + 12 ns
MC32 td(FXL-DXV) Delay time, FSX low to DX valid C − 2 C + 1 3P + 4 3P + 12 ns
†For all SPI slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/2 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
‡P = 1/CPU clock frequency. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
§T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * P
C = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) * P when CLKGDV is even
D = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * P when CLKGDV is even
¶FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for slave McBSP
#FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master clock
(CLKX).
LSB MC26
MC29
MC23 MC24
MSB
CLKX
FSX
DX
DR
Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)Bit 0
Bit 0 Bit (n−1) (n−2) (n−3) (n−4)
MC37
MC39
MC36
MC38
MC32
Figure 5−29. McBSP Timings as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
103
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.14.4 McBSP General-Purpose I/O Timings
Table 5−35 and Table 5−36 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−30).
Table 5−35. McBSP General-Purpose I/O Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
MC20 tsu(MGPIO-COH) Setup time, MGPIOx input mode before CLKOUT high†7 ns
MC21 th(COH-MGPIO) Hold time, MGPIOx input mode after CLKOUT high†0 ns
†MGPIOx refers to CLKRx, FSRx, DRx, CLKXx, or FSXx when configured as a general-purpose input.
Table 5−36. McBSP General-Purpose I/O Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
MC22 td(COH-MGPIO) Delay time, CLKOUT high to MGPIOx output mode‡0 3 ns
‡MGPIOx refers to CLKRx, FSRx, CLKXx, FSXx, or DXx when configured as a general-purpose output.
CLKOUT†
MGPIO‡
Input Mode
MGPIO§
Output Mode
MC20
MC21
MC22
†CLKOUT reflects the CPU clock.
‡MGPIOx refers to CLKRx, FSRx, DRx, CLKXx, or FSXx when configured as a general-purpose input.
§MGPIOx refers to CLKRx, FSRx, CLKXx, FSXx, or DXx when configured as a general-purpose output.
Figure 5−30. McBSP General-Purpose I/O Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
104 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.15 Enhanced Host-Port Interface (EHPI) Timings
Table 5−37 and Table 5−38 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−31
through Figure 5−35).
Table 5−37. EHPI Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
E11 tsu(HASL-HDSL) Setup time, HAS low before HDS low 4 ns
E12 th(HDSL-HASL) Hold time, HAS low after HDS low 3 ns
E13 tsu(HCNTLV-HDSL) Setup time, (HR/W, HA[13:0], HBE[1:0], HCNTL[1:0]) valid before HDS low 2 ns
E14 th(HDSL-HCNTLIV) Hold time, (HR/W, HA[13:0], HBE[1:0], HCNTL[1:0]) invalid after HDS low 4 ns
E15 tw(HDSL) Pulse duration, HDS low 4P†ns
E16 tw(HDSH) Pulse duration, HDS high 4P†ns
E17 tsu(HDV-HDSH) Setup time, HD bus write data valid before HDS high 3 ns
E18 th(HDSH-HDIV) Hold time, HD bus write data invalid after HDS high 4 ns
E19 tsu(HCNTLV-HASL) Setup time, (HR/W, HBE[1:0], HCNTL[1:0]) valid before HAS low 2 ns
E20 th(HASL-HCNTLIV) Hold time, (HR/W, HBE[1:0], HCNTL[1:0]) valid after HAS low 3 ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
Table 5−38. EHPI Switching Characteristics
NO.PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
E1 td(HDSL-HDD)M Delay time, HDS low to HD bus read data driven
(memory access) 6 16 ns
E2 td(HDSL-HDV1)M Delay time, HDS low to HD bus read data valid
(memory access) 14P+10†‡ ns
E4 td(HDSL-HDD)R Delay time, HDS low to HD bus read data driven
(register access) 6 16 ns
E5 td(HDSL-HDV)R Delay time, HDS low to HD bus read data valid
(register access) 16 ns
E6 tdis(HDSH-HDIV) Disable time, HDS high to HD bus read data invalid 6 16 ns
E7 td(HDSL-HRDYL) Delay time, HDS low to HRDY low (during reads) P+10†ns
E8 td(HDV-HRDYH) Delay time, HD bus valid to HRDY high (during reads) 2 ns
E9 td(HDSH-HRDYL) Delay time, HDS high to HRDY low (during writes) 16 ns
E10 td(HDSH-HRDYH) Delay time, HDS high to HRDY high (during writes) 14P+10†‡ ns
†P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 200 MHz, use P = 5 ns.
‡EHPI latency is dependent on the number of DMA channels active, their priorities and their source/destination ports. The latency shown assumes
no competing CPU or DMA activity to the memory resource being accessed by the EHPI.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
105
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
HCNTL0
HR/W
Read Data
Valid
HRDY
HA[13:0]
HDS
HCS
HD[15:0]
(read)
Valid
E16
E14
E13
E1
E10
E2
Valid Valid
Write Data
HD[15:0]
(write)
E15
E17 E18
Read Write
E6
E8E7 E9
E13 E14
E15
HBE[1:0] Valid Valid
NOTES: A. Any non-multiplexed access with HCNTL0 low will result in HPIC register access. For data read or write, HCNTL0 must stay high
during the EHPI access.
B. The falling edge of HCS must occur concurrent with or before the falling edge of HDS. The rising edge of HCS must occur
concurrent with or after the rising edge of HDS. If HDS1 and/or HDS2 are tied permanently active and HCS is used as a strobe,
the timing requirements shown for HDS apply to HCS. Operation with HCS as a strobe is not recommended because HCS gates
output of HRDY (when HCS is high, HRDY is not driven).
Figure 5−31. EHPI Nonmultiplexed Read/W rite Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
106 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
HR/W
Read Data
HRDY
HCNTL[1:0]
HAS
HCS
HD[15:0]
(read)
E11
E13
E4
E5
Valid (11)
Write Data
HD[15:0]
(write)
E12
E13
E17 E18
Read Write
HDS
E15 E16 E15
E12 E11
E20
E19
E14
E20
E19
Valid (11)
E10
E6
E14
E8E7 E9
HBE[1:0] Valid Valid
NOTE: The falling edge of HCS must occur concurrent with or before the falling edge of HDS. The rising edge of HCS must occur concurrent
with or after the rising edge of HDS. If HDS1 and/or HDS2 are tied permanently active and HCS is used as a strobe, the timing
requirements shown for HDS apply to HCS. Operation with HCS as a strobe is not recommended because HCS gates output of HRDY
(when HCS is high, HRDY is not driven).
Figure 5−32. EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Read/Write Timings Without Autoincrement
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
107
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
HR/W
Read Data
n
HRDY
HDS
HAS
HCS
HD[15:0]
(read)
H
PIA contents n + 1 n + 2
E11 E12
E15 E16
E20
E13
E1
E2
E19
E14
E6
E8E7
Read Data
E1
E2 E6
E8E7
HCNTL[1:0] Valid (01) Valid (01)
HBE[1:0] Valid Valid
NOTES: A. During autoincrement mode, although the EHPI internally increments the memory address, reads of the HPIA register by the hos
t
will always indicate the base address.
B. In autoincrement mode, if HBE[1:0] are used to access the data as 8-bit-wide units, the HPIA increments only following each high
byte (HBE1 low) access.
C. The falling edge of HCS must occur concurrent with or before the falling edge of HDS. The rising edge of HCS must occu
r
concurrent with or after the rising edge of HDS. If HDS1 and/or HDS2 are tied permanently active and HCS is used as a strobe
,
the timing requirements shown for HDS apply to HCS. Operation with HCS as a strobe is not recommended because HCS gate
s
output of HRDY (when HCS is high, HRDY is not driven).
Figure 5−33. EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Read Timings With Autoincrement
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
108 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
HR/W
Write DataWrite Data
n
HRDY
HCNTL[1:0]
HDS
HAS
HCS
HD[15:0]
(write)
H
PIA contents
Valid (01) Valid (01)
n + 1
E11 E12
E15 E16
E20
E13
E17 E18
E9 E10 E10
E19
E14
E9
HBE[1:0] Valid Valid
NOTES: A. During autoincrement mode, although the EHPI internally increments the memory address, reads of the HPIA register by the hos
t
will always indicate the base address.
B. The falling edge of HCS must occur concurrent with or before the falling edge of HDS. The rising edge of HCS must occu
r
concurrent with or after the rising edge of HDS. If HDS1 and/or HDS2 are tied permanently active and HCS is used as a strobe
,
the timing requirements shown for HDS apply to HCS. Operation with HCS as a strobe is not recommended because HCS gate
s
output of HRDY (when HCS is high, HRDY is not driven).
Figure 5−34. EHPI Multiplexed Memory (HPID) Write Timings With Autoincrement
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
109
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
HR/W
Read Data
HRDY
HCNTL[1:0]
HAS
HCS
HD[15:0]
(read)
E11
E13
E4
E5
Valid (10 or 00)
Write Data
HD[15:0]
(write)
E12
E13
E17 E18
Read Write
HDS
E15 E16 E15
E12 E11
E20
E19
E14
E20E19
Valid (10 or 00)
E14
E6
HBE[1:0] Valid Valid
NOTES: A. During autoincrement mode, although the EHPI internally increments the memory address, reads of the HPIA register by the host
will always indicate the base address.
B. The falling edge of HCS must occur concurrent with or before the falling edge of HDS. The rising edge of HCS must occur
concurrent with or after the rising edge of HDS. If HDS1 and/or HDS2 are tied permanently active and HCS is used as a strobe,
the timing requirements shown for HDS apply to HCS. Operation with HCS as a strobe is not recommended because HCS gates
output of HRDY (when HCS is high, HRDY is not driven).
Figure 5−35. EHPI Multiplexed Register Read/W rite Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
110 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.16 I2C Timings
Table 5−39 and Table 5−40 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−36 and
Figure 5−37).
Table 5−39. I2C Signals (SDA and SCL) Timing Requirements
NO.
STANDARD
MODE FAST
MODE
UNIT
NO.
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
IC1 tc(SCL) Cycle time, SCL 10 2.5 µs
IC2 tsu(SCLH-SDAL) Setup time, SCL high before SDA low for a repeated START
condition 4.7 0.6 µs
IC3 th(SCLL-SDAL) Hold time, SCL low after SDA low for a START and a repeated
START condition 4 0.6 µs
IC4 tw(SCLL) Pulse duration, SCL low 4.7 1.3 µs
IC5 tw(SCLH) Pulse duration, SCL high 4 0.6 µs
IC6 tsu(SDA-SCLH) Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high 250 100†ns
IC7 th(SDA-SCLL) Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low 0‡0‡0.9§µs
IC8 tw(SDAH) Pulse duration, SDA high between ST OP and START conditions 4.7 1.3 µs
IC9 tr(SDA) Rise time, SDA 1000 20 + 0.1Cb¶300 ns
IC10 tr(SCL) Rise time, SCL 1000 20 + 0.1Cb¶300 ns
IC11 tf(SDA) Fall time, SDA 300 20 + 0.1Cb¶300 ns
IC12 tf(SCL) Fall time, SCL 300 20 + 0.1Cb¶300 ns
IC13 tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition) 4.0 0.6 µs
IC14 tw(SP) Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed) 0 50 ns
IC15 Cb¶Capacitive load for each bus line 400 400 pF
†A Fast-mode I2C-bus device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH) ≥ 250 ns must then be met.
This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the LOW period
of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH) = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard-mode
I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
‡A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the undefined
region of the falling edge of SCL.
§The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the LOW period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
¶Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
IC10
IC8 IC4
IC3 IC7 IC12
IC5
IC6 IC14
IC2
IC3
IC13
Stop Start Repeated
Start Stop
SDA
SCL
IC1
IC11 IC9
Figure 5−36. I2C Receive Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
I2C Bus is a trademark of Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V.
Electrical Specifications
111
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
Table 5−40. I2C Signals (SDA and SCL) Switching Characteristics
NO.
PARAMETER
STANDARD
MODE FAST
MODE
UNIT
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN MAX MIN MAX
UNIT
IC16 tc(SCL) Cycle time, SCL 10 2.5 µs
IC17 td(SCLH-SDAL) Delay time, SCL high to SDA low for a repeated START
condition 4.7 0.6 µs
IC18 td(SDAL-SCLL) Delay time, SDA low to SCL low for a START and a repeated
START condition 4 0.6 µs
IC19 tw(SCLL) Pulse duration, SCL low 4.7 1.3 µs
IC20 tw(SCLH) Pulse duration, SCL high 4 0.6 µs
IC21 td(SDA-SCLH) Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high 250 100 ns
IC22 tv(SCLL-SDAV) Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low 0 0 0.9 µs
IC23 tw(SDAH) Pulse duration, SDA high between ST OP and START conditions 4.7 1.3 µs
IC24 tr(SDA) Rise time, SDA 1000 20 + 0.1Cb†300 ns
IC25 tr(SCL) Rise time, SCL 1000 20 + 0.1Cb†300 ns
IC26 tf(SDA) Fall time, SDA 300 20 + 0.1Cb†300 ns
IC27 tf(SCL) Fall time, SCL 300 20 + 0.1Cb†300 ns
IC28 td(SCLH-SDAH) Delay time, SCL high to SDA high for a STOP condition 4 0.6 µs
IC29 CpCapacitance for each I2C pin 10 10 pF
†Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
IC25
IC23 IC19
IC18 IC22 IC27
IC20
IC21
IC17
IC18
IC28
Stop Start Repeated
Start Stop
SDA
SCL
IC16
IC26 IC24
Figure 5−37. I2C Transmit Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
112 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.17 MultiMedia Card (MMC) Timings
Table 5−41 and Table 5−42 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−38).
Table 5−41. MultiMedia Card (MMC) Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
MMC7 tsu(DV-CLKH) Setup time, data valid before clock high 9 ns
MMC8 th(CLKH-DV) Hold time, data valid after clock high 0 ns
Table 5−42. MultiMedia Card (MMC) Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
MMC1 f(PP) Clock frequency data transfer mode (PP) (CL = 100 pF) 17.2†MHz
MMC2 f(OD) Clock frequency identification mode (OD) (CL = 250 pF) 400 kHz
MMC3 tw(CLKL) Clock low time (CL = 100 pF) 10 ns
MMC4 tw(CLKH) Clock high time (CL = 100 pF) 10 ns
MMC5 tr(CLK) Clock rise time 5 ns
MMC6 tf(CLK) Clock fall time 5 ns
MMC9 td(CLKL-DV) Delay time, MMC.CLK low to data valid −4 1 ns
†Maximum clock frequency specified in MMC Specification version 3.2 is 20 MHz. The 5509A can support clock frequency as high as 17.2 MHz.
MMC6
MMC5
MMC1
MMC4
MMC8 MMC7
MMC9
MMC.CLK
MMC.CMD
MMC.DATx
MMC.CMD
MMC.DATx
Figure 5−38. MultiMedia Card (MMC) Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
113
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
5.18 Secure Digital (SD) Card Timings
Table 5−43 and Table 5−44 assume testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−39).
Table 5−43. Secure Digital (SD) Card Timing Requirements
NO. MIN MAX UNIT
SD7 tsu(DV-CLKH) Setup time, data valid before clock high 9 ns
SD8 th(CLKH-DV) Hold time, data valid after clock high 0 ns
Table 5−44. Secure Digital (SD) Card Switching Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
SD1 f(PP) Clock frequency data transfer mode (PP) (CL = 100 pF) 21†MHz
SD2 f(OD) Clock frequency identification mode (OD) (CL = 250 pF) 400 kHz
SD3 tw(CLKL) Clock low time (CL = 100 pF) 10 ns
SD4 tw(CLKH) Clock high time (CL = 100 pF) 10 ns
SD5 tr(CLK) Clock rise time 5 ns
SD6 tf(CLK) Clock fall time 5 ns
SD9 td(CLKL-DV) Delay time, SD.CLK low to data valid −4 1 ns
†Maximum clock frequency specified in the SD Specification is 25 MHz. The 5509A can support clock frequency as high as 21.0 MHz.
SD6
SD5
SD1
SD4
SD8 SD7
SD9
SD.CLK
SD.CMD
SD.DATx
SD.CMD
SD.DATx
SD3
Figure 5−39. Secure Digital (SD) Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
114 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.19 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Timings
Table 5−45 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5−40 and Figure 5−41).
Table 5−45. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Characteristics
NO.
PARAMETER
FULL SPEED
12Mbps
UNIT
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN TYP MAX
UNIT
U1 trRise time of DP and DN signals†4 20 ns
U2 tfFall time of DP and DN signals†4 20 ns
U3 tRFM Rise/Fall time matching‡90 111.11 %
U4 VCRS Output signal cross-over voltage†1.3 2.0 V
U5 tjr Differential propagation jitter§¶ −2 2 ns
U6 fop Operating frequency (Full speed mode) 12 Mb/s
U7 Rs(DP) Series resistor 24 Ω
U8 Rs(DN) Series resistor 24 Ω
U9 Cedge(DP) Edge rate control capacitor 22 pF
U10 Cedge(DN) Edge rate control capacitor 22 pF
†CL = 50 pF
‡(tr/tf) x 100
§tpx(1) − tpx(0)
¶USB PLL is susceptible to power supply ripple, refer to recommend operating conditions for allowable supply ripple to meet USB specifications
of peak-to-peak jitter tolerance ( 0.6% at 6 MHz bit clock and 2.4% at 12 MHz bit clock).
VOL
U1
U2
VCRS
VOH
tperiod + Jitter
90%
10%
D−
D+
Figure 5−40. USB Timings
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
115
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
DP
DN
5509A
PU
USBVDD
CL
CL
D+
D−
U8
U7
R(PU)
1.5 kW
U9
U10
NOTES: A. A full-speed buffer is measured with the load shown.
B. CL = 50 pF
Figure 5−41. Full-Speed Loads
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Electrical Specifications
116 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
5.20 ADC Timings
Table 5−46 assumes testing over recommended operating conditions.
Table 5−46. ADC Characteristics
NO. PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT
A1 tc(SCLC) Cycle time, ADC internal conversion clock 500 ns
A2 td(AQ) Delay time, ADC sample and hold acquisition time 40 µs
A3 td(CONV) Delay time, ADC conversion time 13 * tc(SCLC) ns
A4
SDNL
Static differential non-linearity error 2 LSB
A4 SDNL Static integral non-linearity error 3 LSB
A5 Zset Zero-scale offset error 9 LSB
A6 Fset Full-scale offset error 9 LSB
A7 Analog input impedance 1 MΩ
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Mechanical Data
117
November 2002 − Revised August 2003 SPRS205A
6 Mechanical Data
6.1 Ball Grid Array Mechanical Data
GHH (S-PBGA-N179) PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
0,08 0,10
1,40 MAX0,85
0,55
0,45 0,45
0,35
0,95
11,90
12,10 SQ
4173504-3/C 12/01
Seating Plane
7
B
A
21
C
D
F
E
G
43 65
N
K
H
J
L
M
P
98 1110 1312 14
0,40
10,40 TYP
A1 Corner
Bottom View
0,80
0,80
0,40
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. MicroStar BGAt configuration.
Figure 6−1. TMS320VC5509A 179-Ball MicroStar BGA Plastic Ball Grid Array Package
MicroStar BGA is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Mechanical Data
118 November 2002 − Revised August 2003SPRS205A
6.2 Low-Profile Quad Flatpack Mechanical Data
PGE (S-PQFP-G144) PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK
4040147/C 10/96
0,27
72
0,17
37
73
0,13 NOM
0,25
0,75
0,45
0,05 MIN
36
Seating Plane
Gage Plane
108
109
144
SQ
SQ
22,20
21,80
1
19,80
17,50 TYP
20,20
1,35
1,45
1,60 MAX
M
0,08
0°−ā7°
0,08
0,50
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MO-136
Figure 6−2. TMS320VC5509A 144-Pin Low-Profile Quad Flatpack
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Product Folder : TMS320VC5509A - Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Contact Us Buy About TI TI Worldwide my.TI Advanced Search
Keyword
Part Number
TI Home > Semiconductors > DSP > TMS320C5000 ™ DSP Platform > TMS320C55x DSP Generation >
TMS320VC5509A, Status: ACTIVE
Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Features Samples Technical Documents
Quality & Pb-Free Data Pricing/Packaging Applications Notes
Related Products Inventory Simulation Models
Development Tools Symbols/Footprints Reference Designs
Datasheet
TMS320VC5509A Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor (Rev. C) (tms320vc5509a.pdf, 2097 KB)
10 Sep 2004 Download
TMS320VC5509A Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (Rev. C) (sprz200c.pdf, 347 KB)
16 Aug 2004 Download
TMS320VC5509A DSP Hardware Designer's Resource Guide (spraa30.htm, 12 KB)
29 Jun 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5509A-200
Frequency (MHz) 200@1.6V, 144@1.35V, 108@1.2V
MIPS 400, 288, 216
Total Addressable
Memory Space
(Words)
8M (16M Bytes)
RAM (Words) 128K (256K Bytes)
ROM (Words) 32K (64K Bytes)
DMA 6-Ch Int/Ext
MISC ADC, RTC, DPLL, WD
Timers 2
Serial Ports USB2.0 Full-Speed, 3 McBSPs, I2C, 2 MMC/SDs
HPI (Bits) EHPI(16)
Boot Loader
Available YES
Core Supply (Volts) 1.6, 1.35, 1.2
IO Supply (Volts) 2.7-3.6
Samples
Inventory
Product Information
Features Save this to your personal library
● High-Performance, Low-Power, Fixed-Point TMS320C55x™ Digital Signal Processor
❍ 9.26-, 6.95-, 5-ns Instruction Cycle Time
❍ 108-, 144-, 200-MHz Clock Rate
❍ One/Two Instruction(s) Executed per Cycle
❍ Dual Multipliers [Up to 400 Million Multiply-Accumulates per Second (MMACS)]
❍ Two Arithmetic/Logic Units (ALUs)
❍ Three Internal Data/Operand Read Buses and Two Internal Data/Operand Write Buses
● 128K x 16-Bit On-Chip RAM, Composed of:
❍ 64K Bytes of Dual-Access RAM (DARAM) 8 Blocks of 4K × 16-Bit
❍ 192K Bytes of Single-Access RAM (SARAM) 24 Blocks of 4K × 16-Bit
● 64K Bytes of One-Wait-State On-Chip ROM (32K × 16-Bit)
● 8M × 16-Bit Maximum Addressable External Memory Space (Synchronous DRAM)
● 16-Bit External Parallel Bus Memory Supporting Either:
❍ External Memory Interface (EMIF) With GPIO Capabilities and Glueless Interface to:
Refine Your Selection
- Getting Started
- Selection Guides
- DSP: TMS320C55x DSP
Generation
Support
- KnowledgeBase
- Contact Technical Support
- Training
- Discussion Groups
- Consulting Services
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tms320vc5509a.html (1 of 6) [1/4/2005 5:24:28 PM]
Product Folder : TMS320VC5509A - Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
■ Asynchronous Static RAM (SRAM)
■ Asynchronous EPROM
■ Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM)
❍ 16-Bit Parallel Enhanced Host-Port Interface (HPI) with GPIO Capabilities
● Programmable Low-Power Control of Six Device Functional Domains
● On-Chip Scan-Based Emulation Logic
● On-Chip Peripherals
❍ Two 20-Bit Timers
❍ Watchdog Timer
❍ Six-Channel Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller
❍ Three Serial Ports Supporting a Combination of:
■ Up to 3 Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports (McBSPs)
■ Up to 2 MultiMedia/Secure Digital Card Interfaces
❍ Programmable Phase-Locked Loop Clock Generator
❍ Seven (LQFP) or Eight (BGA) General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins and a General-Purpose Output
Pin (XF)
❍ USB Full-speed (12 Mbps) Slave Port Supporting Bulk, Interrupt and Isochronous Transfers
❍ Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Multi-Master and Slave Interface
❍ Real-Time Clock (RTC) With Crystal Input, Separate Clock Domain, Separate Power Supply
❍ 4-Channel (BGA) or 2-Channel (LQFP) 10-Bit Successive Approximation A/D
● IEEE Std 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary Scan Logic
● Packages:
❍ 144-Terminal Low-Profile Quad Flatpack (LQFP) (PGE Suffix)
❍ 179-Terminal MicroStar BGA™ (Ball Grid Array) (GHH Suffix)
● 1.2-V Core (108 MHz), 2.7-V – 3.6-V I/Os
● 1.35-V Core (144 MHz), 2.7-V – 3.6-V I/Os
● 1.6-V Core (200 MHz), 2.7-V – 3.6-V I/Os
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
TMS320C55x and MicroStar BGA are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
C55x, eXpressDSP, Code Composer Studio, DSP/BIOS, RTDX, and XDS510 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Description
The TMS320VC5509A fixed-point digital signal processor (DSP) is based on the TMS320C55x DSP
generation CPU processor core. The C55x™ DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power
through increased parallelism and total focus on reduction in power dissipation. The CPU supports an
internal bus structure that is composed of one program bus, three data read buses, two data write buses,
and additional buses dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These buses provide the ability to perform
up to three data reads and two data writes in a single cycle. In parallel, the DMA controller can perform up
to two data transfers per cycle independent of the CPU activity.
The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit multiplication
in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic/logic unit (ALU) is supported by an additional 16-bit ALU. Use
of the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize parallel activity and power
consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data Unit (DU) of the C55x CPU.
The C55x DSP generation supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The
Instruction Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory and queues
instructions for the Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit decodes the instructions, directs tasks to AU and
DU resources, and manages the fully protected pipeline. Predictive branching capability avoids pipeline
flushes on execution of conditional instructions.
The general-purpose input and output functions and the 10-bit A/D provide sufficient pins for status,
interrupts, and bit I/O for LCDs, keyboards, and media interfaces. The parallel interface operates in two
modes, either as a slave to a microcontroller using the HPI port or as a parallel media interface using the
asynchronous EMIF. Serial media is supported through two MultiMedia Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD)
peripherals and three McBSPs.
The 5509A peripheral set includes an external memory interface (EMIF) that provides glueless access to
asynchronous memories like EPROM and SRAM, as well as to high-speed, high-density memories such as
synchronous DRAM. Additional peripherals include Universal Serial Bus (USB), real-time clock, watchdog
timer, I2C multi-master and slave interface, and a unique device ID. Three full-duplex multichannel
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tms320vc5509a.html (2 of 6) [1/4/2005 5:24:28 PM]
Product Folder : TMS320VC5509A - Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
buffered serial ports (McBSPs) provide glueless interface to a variety of industry-standard serial devices,
and multichannel communication with up to 128 separately enabled channels. The enhanced host-port
interface (HPI) is a 16-bit parallel interface used to provide host processor access to 32K words of internal
memory on the 5509A. The HPI can be configured in either multiplexed or non-multiplexed mode to provide
glueless interface to a wide variety of host processors. The DMA controller provides data movement for six
independent channel contexts without CPU intervention, providing DMA throughput of up to two 16-bit
words per cycle. Two general-purpose timers, up to eight dedicated general-purpose I/O (GPIO) pins, and
digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) clock generation are also included.
The 5509A is supported by the industry’s award-winning eXpressDSP™, Code Composer Studio™
Integrated Development Environment (IDE), DSP/BIOS™, Texas Instruments’ algorithm standard, and the
industry’s largest third-party network. The Code Composer Studio IDE features code generation tools
including a C Compiler and Visual Linker, simulator, RTDX™, XDS510™ emulation device drivers, and
evaluation modules. The 5509A is also supported by the C55x DSP Library which features more than 50
foundational software kernels (FIR filters, IIR filters, FFTs, and various math functions) as well as chip and
board support libraries.
The TMS320C55x DSP core was created with an open architecture that allows the addition of application-
specific hardware to boost performance on specific algorithms. The hardware extensions on the 5509A
strike the perfect balance of fixed function performance with programmable flexibility, while achieving low-
power consumption, and cost that traditionally has been difficult to find in the video-processor market. The
extensions allow the 5509A to deliver exceptional video codec performance with more than half its
bandwidth available for performing additional functions such as color space conversion, user-interface
operations, security, TCP/IP, voice recognition, and text-to-speech conversion. As a result, a single 5509A
DSP can power most portable digital video applications with processing headroom to spare. For more
information, see the TMS320C55x Hardware Extensions for Image/Video Applications Programmer’s
Reference (literature number SPRU098). For more information on using the the DSP Image Processing
Library, see the TMS320C55x Image/Video Processing Library Programmer’s Reference (literature number
SPRU037).
Pricing/Packaging/Samples
Price Packaging Samples
Device Status Budget Price ($US) | QTY Package Type | Pins Symbols Footprints STD Pack QTY Samples
TMS320VC5509AGHH ACTIVE 17.28 | 1KU BGA (GHH) | 179 160 Contact TI Distributor or
Sales Office
TMS320VC5509AGHHR ACTIVE 17.78 | 1KU BGA (GHH) | 179 1000 Not Available
TMS320VC5509APGE ACTIVE 17.28 | 1KU LQFP (PGE) | 144 60 Contact TI Distributor or
Sales Office
TMS320VC5509AZHH ACTIVE 17.28 | 1KU BGA MICROSTAR (ZHH) | 179 160 Not Available
TMX320VC5509AGHH ACTIVE BGA (GHH) | 179 Not Available
TMX320VC5509APGE ACTIVE LQFP (PGE) | 144 Not Available
Inventory
TI Inventory Status Reported Distributor Inventory
TMS320VC5509AGHH As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005 As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005
In Stock In Progress QTY | Date Lead Time In Stock Distributor: Region | Company Purchase
0* 129 | 9 Mar 12 Weeks 390 Americas | DigiKey
129 | 14 Mar 344 Americas | Avnet
1924 | 7 Apr 290 Americas | Memec Insight
2334 | 12 Apr 38 Europe | Arrow Northern Europe
66 | 19 Apr 29 Americas | Newark Electronics
TMS320VC5509AGHHR As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005 As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005
In Stock In Progress QTY | Date Lead Time In Stock Distributor: Region | Company Purchase
0* 256 | 6 Jan 12 Weeks None Reported
View Distributors
122 | 7 Mar
1939 | 4 Apr
1210 | 11 Apr
171 | 2 May
TMS320VC5509APGE As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005 As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005
In Stock In Progress QTY | Date Lead Time In Stock Distributor: Region | Company Purchase
0* 129 | 15 Mar 12 Weeks 58 Americas | DigiKey
2053 | 13 Apr 49 Americas | Avnet
View all Distributors
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tms320vc5509a.html (3 of 6) [1/4/2005 5:24:28 PM]
Choose a Region
Product Folder : TMS320VC5509A - Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
1281 | 20 Apr 44 Americas | Memec Insight
181 | 10 May 28 Europe | Spoerle
768 | 17 May
TMS320VC5509AZHH As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005 As of 10:02 AM GMT, 4 Jan 2005
In Stock In Progress QTY | Date Lead Time In Stock Distributor: Region | Company Purchase
0* 122 | 7 Mar 12 Weeks None Reported
View Distributors
1939 | 4 Apr
1210 | 11 Apr
171 | 2 May
725 | 9 May
* Our information is updated daily, so please check back with us soon if
this does not meet your needs. You may also contact your TI Authorized
Distributor, including those listed above, for real time stock information.
** Lead time information is not available at this time. However, our
information is updated daily so please check back with us soon. Please
contact your preferred TI Authorized Distributor for additional
information.
Quality & Lead (Pb)-Free Data
Product Content MTBF/FIT Rate
Device Eco Plan* Lead/Ball Finish MSL Rating/Peak Reflow Details Details
TMS320VC5509AGHH None SNPB Level-3-220C-168HR View View
TMS320VC5509AGHHR None SNPB Level-3-220C-168HR View View
TMS320VC5509APGE None CU NIPDAU Level-4-220C-72HR View View
TMS320VC5509AZHH Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) SNAGCU Level-3-260C-168HR View View
TMX320VC5509AGHH View
TMX320VC5509APGE View
* May not be currently available - please click on the Product Content
Details "View" link in the table above for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
If the information you are requesting is not available online at this
time, contact one of our Product Information Centers regarding the
availability of this information.
TI Recommends
Technical Documents
Datasheets Keep track of what's new
TMS320VC5509A Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor (Rev. C) (tms320vc5509a.pdf,2097 KB)
10 Sep 2004 Download
TMS320VC5509A Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata (Rev. C) (sprz200c.pdf,347 KB)
16 Aug 2004 Download
Application Notes
Using the TMS320VC5503/VC5507/VC5509/VC5509A Bootloader (Rev. E) (spra375e.htm,11 KB)
19 Oct 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5509 to TMS320VC5509A Migration (Rev. C) (spra983c.htm,12 KB)
10 Sep 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5509A DSP Hardware Designer's Resource Guide (spraa30.htm,12 KB)
29 Jun 2004 Abstract
Using the USB APLL on the TMS320VC5507/5509A (Rev. A) (spra997a.htm,12 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Abstract
Disabling the Internal Oscillator on the TMS320VC5507/5509/5509A DSP (Rev. C) (spra078c.htm,11 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5509A Power Consumption Summary (Rev. A) (spraa04a.htm,12 KB)
11 Jun 2004 Abstract
Programming the TMS320VC5509 Multi Media Controller in Native Mode (Rev. A) (spra808a.htm,12 KB)
06 Jun 2003 Abstract
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tms320vc5509a.html (4 of 6) [1/4/2005 5:24:28 PM]
Product Folder : TMS320VC5509A - Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
Using theTMS320C5509/C5509A USB Bootloader (Rev. A) (spra840a.htm,12 KB)
05 Feb 2003 Abstract
Programming the TMS320VC5509 I2C Peripheral (spra785.htm,12 KB)
01 Nov 2001 Abstract
View Application Notes for TMS320C55x DSP Generation
User Guides
TMS320VC5503/5507/5509/5510 Direct Memory Access(DMA) Controller Reference Guide (Rev. C) (spru587c.htm,11 KB)
21 Oct 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5503/5507/5509/5510 DSP Timers Reference Guide (Rev. B) (spru595b.htm,12 KB)
10 Sep 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5503/5507/5509 DSP Host Port Interface (HPI) Reference Guide (Rev. B) (spru619b.htm,11 KB)
23 Aug 2004 Abstract
TMS320C55x DSP CPU Programmer's Reference Supplement (Rev. E) (spru652e.pdf,382 KB)
16 Aug 2004 Download
TMS320VC5507/5509 DSP Universal Serial Bus (USB) Module Reference Guide (Rev. A) (spru596a.pdf,761 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Download
TMS320VC5501/5502/5503/5507/5509/5510 DSP (McBSP) Reference Guide (Rev. D) (spru592d.pdf,1228 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Download
TMS320VC5503/5507/5509 DSP Real-Time Clock (RTC) Reference Guide (Rev. B) (spru594b.pdf,236 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Download
TMS320VC5507/5509 DSP Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Reference Guide (Rev. B) (spru586b.pdf,102 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Download
TMS320VC5501/5502/5503/5507/5509 DSP Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Module RG (Rev. C) (spru146c.pdf,284 KB)
25 Jun 2004 Download
TMS320VC5503/5507/5509 DSP External Memory Interface (EMIF) Reference Guide (Rev. A) (spru670a.pdf,570 KB)
05 Mar 2004 Download
TMS320C55x DSP CPU Reference Guide (Rev. F) (spru371f.htm,11 KB)
25 Feb 2004 Abstract
TMS320C55x DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (Rev. G) (spru317g.htm,11 KB)
19 Feb 2004 Abstract
TMS320VC5509 DSP MultiMediaCard / SD Card Controller Reference Guide (spru593.htm,11 KB)
24 Jun 2003 Abstract
View User Guides for TMS320C55x DSP Generation
Simulation Models
IBIS Model
VC5509A GHH IBIS Model (sprm153.ibs,444 KB)
04 May 2004 ibis / zip
VC5509A PGE IBIS Model (sprm152.ibs,441 KB)
04 May 2004 ibis / zip
BSDL Model
VC5509A GHH BSDL Model (sprm155.zip,6 KB)
04 May 2004 zip
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tms320vc5509a.html (5 of 6) [1/4/2005 5:24:28 PM]
Product Folder : TMS320VC5509A - Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor
VC5509A PGE BSDL Model (sprm154.zip,6 KB)
04 May 2004 zip
Block Diagrams
Digital Still Camera
Fingerprint Biometrics
MP3 Player/Recorder
More Literature
View More Literature for TMS320C55x DSP Generation
Related Products
Related Tools
Development Tools Part # Company Tool Type
Code Composer Studio IDE CCSTUDIO Texas Instruments Code Composer Studio(TM) IDE
Code Composer Studio IDE Subscription Service CCSTUDIOSUBSCRIPTIONS Texas Instruments Code Composer Studio(TM) IDE
Fingerprint Authentication Development Tool (FADT) TMDSFDCAFS86 Texas Instruments Daughter Cards
Fingerprint Authentication Development Tool (FADT) TMDSFDCATM31 Texas Instruments Daughter Cards
Fingerprint Authentication Development Tool (FADT) TMDSFDCFPC10 Texas Instruments Developer Kits
Fingerprint Authentication Development Tool (FADT) TMDSFDCFPC31 Texas Instruments Development Boards/EVMs
EVM320VC5509A Evaluation Module with keypad/display
module and power supply 701856 Spectrum Digital, Inc. Development Boards/EVMs
XDS560 XDS560 Texas Instruments Emulators/Analyzers
xds510 XDS510 Texas Instruments Emulators/Analyzers
TI Developers Conference Proceedings TIDCPRST2004 Texas Instruments Other
TMS320C5510 DSP Starter Kit (DSK) TMDSDSK5510 Texas Instruments Starter Kits
Related Software
Name Part # Company Software Type
TMS320C55x Image Library SPRC101 Texas Instruments Signal Processing Libraries
TMS320C55x DSP Library SPRC100 Texas Instruments Signal Processing Libraries
Reference Framework for eXpressDSP Software SPRC063 Texas Instruments Application Software
TMS320C55x Chip Support Library SPRC133 Texas Instruments Peripheral Drivers
TMS320C5000 DSP Algorithm Developer's Kit SPRC115 Texas Instruments TMS320 DSP Algorithm Standard
DSP/BIOS II Real-Time Kernel DSPBIOS Texas Instruments Real-Time OS - DSP/BIOS
TMS320VC5509A (PGE designator) ORCAD Symbol (sprc171.zip,6 KB)
09 Jun 2004 zip
TMS320VC5509A (GHH designator) ORCAD Symbol (sprc170.zip,7 KB)
09 Jun 2004 zip
Applications
Related Applications
Biometrics
Products | Applications | Support | Site Map
© Copyright 1995-2004 Texas Instruments Incorporated. All rights reserved. Trademarks | Privacy Policy | Terms of Use
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tms320vc5509a.html (6 of 6) [1/4/2005 5:24:28 PM]
